JP2020108831A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of performing efficient control based on transmission/reception of commands.SOLUTION: A losing pattern notice performance command includes a predetermined first losing pattern notice performance command relating to a first losing pattern and a predetermined second losing pattern notice performance command relating to a second losing pattern, a jackpot pattern notice performance command includes a pattern notice performance command relating to a low-profit jackpot, namely, a predetermined jackpot pattern notice performance command, and the second losing pattern notice performance command includes an EVENT command common to a pattern notice performance command relating to the low-profit jackpot.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium.

Generally, a pachinko game machine is provided with a main control board that controls a game and a sub-control board that performs a control process based on a command (production control command) from the main control board. Of these, examples of the sub-control board include a payout control board, a performance control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, an acoustic control board, and the like. Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board executes a process for obtaining a random number, and based on the obtained random number, various pre-reading notice effects and effect control commands for effects related to the jackpot lottery determination are It is designed to send to the control board.
JP, 2005-150332, A

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the type in which the command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board as described above, in order to perform various effect control, it is necessary to provide various kinds of effect control commands. However, simply increasing the types of effect control commands may increase the processing load for command analysis on the side of the sub control board and for effect pattern determination based on the analysis result.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of efficient control based on transmission and reception of commands.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention is a main control means for controlling the progress of a game,
A sub-control unit that is communicatively connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
A main control display means controlled by the main control means,
The main control means,
Control start processing for executing control start processing when power is turned on,
It is possible to execute a game progress interrupt process for executing a game progress interrupt process for progressing a game at a predetermined cycle,
A predetermined random number is obtained based on that the game medium shot in the game area has flowed through the game area and passed a predetermined start area,
The random number includes at least a jackpot random number for jackpot lottery determination, and a special symbol random number for determination of a special symbol showing the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
Based on the jackpot random number, perform a jackpot lottery determination to determine whether it is a jackpot,
Based on the special symbol random number, special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol,
Based on the results of the jackpot lottery determination and the special symbol lottery determination, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display on the main control display means, and if the result of the jackpot lottery determination is a jackpot, the special symbol After the stop display of the symbol, execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than usual,
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area, if the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol is not satisfied, the special symbol holding storage information including at least the big hit random number and the special symbol random number is within a predetermined number. It is possible to remember,
At least the game progress interrupt processing,
When the special symbol reservation storage information occurs when the game medium passes through the starting area, at least the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information are transmitted as the predetermined notice information regarding the generated special symbol hold storage information. Executes a process of transmitting to the sub control means as information,
The sub-control means,
Using the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information, under the condition that the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol relating to the special symbol random number stored as the special symbol holding storage information is not satisfied, It is possible to decide whether to execute multiple types of look-ahead production,
It is decided to execute one type of look-ahead effect depending on whether the hit announcement information and the hit symbol announcement information are information indicating the execution of the first big hit or the execution of the second big hit. In this case, the number of pre-reading effect patterns that can be determined as the pre-reading effect pattern to be executed is different,
When the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information are information indicating execution of a small hit, the pre-reading effect is not executed, which is a pachinko game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine capable of efficient control based on transmission and reception of commands.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of one example of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a main board composition of a Pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a main substrate, a sub-main substrate, and basic functional means of the sub-sub substrate. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a main control display device, (b) is a chart which shows the relationship of each indicator and name in a main control display device. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display example during change of the effect design in the effect display device, (b) is an explanatory view showing a display example during stop of the effect design. (A) is a chart showing a win/fail judgment table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for out-of-sync. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small hit symbol determination table used during a small hit. The chart, (d) is a chart showing a detachment pattern determination table used at the time of detachment. (A) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of the first deviation, (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of the second deviation, (c) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the 16R big hit, (D) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of 4R big hit and small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process in a main board. 12 is a flowchart showing a control start process following FIG. 11. It is a flow chart which shows game progress interruption processing in a main board. It is a flow chart which shows power-off processing in a main board. (A) is a chart showing an initial value random number updating table, and (b) is a chart showing an initial value updating type random number updating table. (A) is a diagram showing a winning notice command, a symbol notice command, and a variation notice command, and (b) is a diagram showing a part of the RWM work area. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening monitoring control process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening monitoring process following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows operation reservation ball number update processing. It is a flow chart which shows notice production judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a selection number acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing a symbol determination process. It is a flow chart which shows 1-byte selection number acquisition processing. It is a chart showing various tables such as a starting port 1 monitoring table. It is a chart showing various tables such as a special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table. It is a chart showing various tables such as special figure 1 jackpot pattern table 2 and the like. It is a chart showing various tables such as special figure 2 jackpot symbol table 3 and the like. It is a chart showing various tables such as a small hit symbol table 3. 8 is a flowchart showing a main part according to another embodiment of the control start processing on the main board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process of power-off confirmation information setting in a main board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the power supply interruption required time in a main board.

Examples of the pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described below. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then the gaming procedure, effect, control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of Pachinko machine>

FIG. 1 shows a front structure of a pachinko game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is mounted on a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Of these, the game board 50 has different constituent elements such as accessory devices and designs according to the model of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the game machine frame 11.

In addition, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationships with the gaming machine frame 11 for a plurality of types of gaming boards 50, it is possible to change the model so that the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. In the following, first, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described, and then the board surface configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

The gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame 13, and a lower front plate 14. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13. Out of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame body used for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to a predetermined position in an island facility in a game arcade (gaming store), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion whose front side is closed.

In addition, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility. Then, wood is used as a material of at least a portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island equipment. It should be noted that instead of wood, it is possible to employ, for example, a nailable plastic material. It is also possible to adopt a construction method other than nailing as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge as the free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and is locked, and is brought into the closed state again. When the front frame 13 is closed, it closes the part between the upper short part of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14.

The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is arranged on the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13 and the above-mentioned dish unit. Through 16, the keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko game machine 10. Then, when the game hall clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the locking device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

In contrast to such a front frame 13, the lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

The glass door 15 arranged in the front part of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can be independently swung with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 are brought into an open state by, for example, a game hall clerk horizontally swinging forward, and are swinged horizontally rearward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13. This results in a closed state.

The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the above-described locking device (not shown). That is, when the amusement hall store clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the above-mentioned cylinder 17 and rotates this key, for example, in the clockwise direction opposite to the time when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is the lock device. And the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap with the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed in so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking device is activated and the glass door 15 is moved to the front side again. Lock on the frame 13.

In addition, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and can be operated, and an operating portion (not shown) of this locking mechanism is moved downward by a game hall clerk, for example. By performing the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap with the front frame 13, and the dish unit 16 is pushed in so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, whereby the locking mechanism is activated and the dish unit 16 is again moved. Lock on the front frame 13.

Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates in a detachable manner, and when the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the gaming board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am trying. As the transparent plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used in addition to the glass plate. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although illustration is omitted, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting a game ball which is a game medium.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a firing handle 20 and the like on the front surface thereof. Of these, the upper ball plate 18, the storage of the game ball, supply of the game ball to the launching device 43 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 4) operated via the firing handle 20, the game to the lower ball plate 19 Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball ejection. Further, the lower ball plate 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball plate 18, and stores the game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms for various functions such as discharging are provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided at the upper corners of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14 and the like, and through these speakers 21, depending on the gaming state, the effect pattern, etc. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Furthermore, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on a portion of the upper ball plate 18 that faces the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper portion of the upper bowl plate 18, and is located near the center of the upper bowl plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is internally provided with an operation button light emitter (not shown) so as to output light in accordance with the effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be made to project upward in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown, a cross key is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and the player can use the cross key to set various environments. The contents of the environment setting can be exemplified by volume adjustment of the speaker 21, brightness adjustment and light amount adjustment of effect display described later, or change of effect mode described later. Further, it is possible to provide a display device capable of performing an effect related to a game and a display related to the above-mentioned environment setting, for example, on the front frame 13 or the like of the gaming machine frame 11.
<Back view of Pachinko game machine>

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the front frame 13, a set base 31 having a game ball passage for guiding or collecting game balls is attached, and below the set base 31, a game machine is attached. A power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the whole and a payout control board 103 for controlling the gaming machine frame side are attached. Further, on the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that integrally controls the entire game, and a sub-board 104 that executes performance control based on a control command from the main board 102 are set substrates 31. Are provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the.

In the set base 31, the prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls that are supplied from the island facility and serve as prize balls. Furthermore, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side portion from above the gaming board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Has been done.

The prize ball passage 34 described above straightens and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. In addition, the above-mentioned payout unit 35 is in communication with the prize ball passage 34 and can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flown down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as prize balls.

The power supply unit 32 described above is provided in the lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power supply unit 32 is provided with a power switch 40 which is a tilt switch. The power switch 40 is installed so that it does not turn off even if the dropped game ball is hit directly, so that it is turned on when the lower part of the power switch 40 is pushed below the center and tilted downward.

The above-mentioned payout control board 103 is arranged in the lower right portion of the set board 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Then, the payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 in accordance with a command relating to the payout from the main board 102 and a lending request from the outside. The payout control board 103 also has a launch control function of controlling the launching device 43 so as to launch the game ball into the game area at a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged in the lower central part on the back side of the game board 50, and is mainly used for various lottery functions and control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub-board 104. It has the central processing function of 10. The above-described sub-board 104 is arranged in the upper central part on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

Then, the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the sub-board 104 constitute a game control device, and details thereof will be described later. As for the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) that plays a main function of effect control, and a sub-sub-board specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation (this embodiment). In the example, it is divided into sub-sub-board 302), but the term "sub-board" includes these. The details of the sub-main substrate 301 and the sub-sub substrate 302 will also be described later. In addition, an external relay terminal board 46 that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like to a device outside the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided on the upper right portion on the back side of the set board 31.
<Board surface composition of game board>

Next, the above-mentioned game board 50 and parts (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin). The game board 50 is formed in a hollow plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like inside. The gaming board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the plate surface on which various board surface components to be described later are mounted facing forward, and is closed by the glass door 15 or the like. , The front of it is covered. Furthermore, on the front surface side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining inner rails and outer rails formed in a curved band shape, and the game area 52 is formed through the transparent plate of the glass door 15. It is visible.

As shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, in the game area 52, there are two starting winning openings, a first starting winning opening 62 and a second starting winning opening 63, and also two big winning openings. A big winning opening 91 and a second big winning opening 92, a left working opening 68a and a right working opening 68b, which are also two working openings, a plurality of general winning openings 72, an out opening 58, and the like are provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 including a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for effect, a center ornament 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

The above-mentioned first starting winning opening 62 is arranged in the lower center of the game area 52, and the second starting winning opening 63 is arranged below the first starting winning opening 62. The first special winning opening 91 is arranged below the second starting winning opening 63, and is located above the out opening 58. The second special winning opening 92 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 52, and is located in the upper right part of the out opening 58. Further, the left operating port 68a is arranged in the upper left part of the game area 52, and the right operating port 68b is arranged in the diagonally right upper part of the second special winning opening 92.

Further, the general winning opening 72 is arranged on the left side of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63, etc., and the outlet 58 is below the first big winning opening 91 and is a game area. It is arranged in the lowermost region of 52. Further, the center decoration 64 has a size that occupies most of the area from the center of the game area 52 to the upper part thereof, and is arranged at a portion displaced to the right from the center of the game area 52 in the left-right direction. Has been done. The effect display device 60 is arranged behind the transparent game board 50, and the display area 194 can be visually recognized through the game board 50 from the central opening of the center ornament 64.

In addition, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails, mechanisms such as a windmill, which are not shown. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left part of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the above-described board surface configuration of the game board 50 can be variously changed depending on, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko game machine 10. Then, other examples of the board configuration will be described later.
<Functions of board parts>

Next, specific functions and configurations related to the individual board components described above will be described. First, the above-mentioned first starting winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first starting winning opening 62 includes a first starting winning detection device 74. The first start winning detection device 74 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is input to the main board 102 described above. .. Then, the first start winning detection device 74 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence/absence of a ball.

The above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening relating to the second game, and is arranged immediately below the first starting winning opening 62. The entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 63 is normally blocked by the first starting winning opening 62. However, the second start winning opening 63 is an ordinary electric accessory (so-called “electric tulip” or “electric Chu”), and a blade that opens when a normal symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. (Reference numeral omitted). Here, hereinafter, the blade of the second starting winning opening 63 is referred to as an "opening/closing blade". Then, by opening and closing the opening/closing blades of the second start winning opening 63 for a predetermined time period, the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening 63. Expanding the second starting winning opening 63 to allow a ball to enter is also called so-called "Den Chu Support" or "Den Support".

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting winning opening 63 is provided with a second starting winning detection device 75 and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening/closing blade. The second start winning detection device 75 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 63, and the output signal of this sensor is input to the main board 102. Then, the second start winning detection device 75 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of a ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing blades are expanded, the easiness of entering the second starting winning opening 63 is higher than the easiness of entering the first starting winning opening 62. However, the relationship of the easiness of entering the ball in the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 should be set as appropriate according to circumstances such as profits based on the results of the first game and the second game. Is possible. Then, for example, when the opening/closing blades of the second starting winning opening 63 are not expanded, no balls are entered, or the opening/closing blades are expanded to open the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting. It is possible to make the winning of the winning holes 63 similar to each other.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as an aspect of opening the second starting winning opening 63. These opening modes include a mode of relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as “short open” or “short opening”) or a relatively long time (for example, 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode in which the opening time is set between the short opening and the long opening. Then, various opening modes of the second starting winning opening 63 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 is provided with a general winning detection device 73 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 73 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 72, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102. Then, the general winning detection device 73 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence/absence of a ball. The general winning detection devices 73 may be provided individually for the general winning openings 72, or one general winning detection device 73 may be shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72.

When the general winning award detecting device 73 is shared by a plurality of general award winning openings 72, the game balls having a plurality of general award winning openings 72 are collected at a position where the general award detecting device 73 is arranged and detected. It is possible to In addition, it is possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 according to their positional relationship, and share the general winning detection device 73 for each group. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls to be paid out is different for the plurality of general prize holes 72, it is possible to group the general prize holes 72 by the number of prize balls. It should be noted that a specific mode of paying out the prize balls will be described later.

The above-mentioned first big winning opening 91 is provided as a big winning opening corresponding to the first game, and has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the first special winning opening 91 includes a first opening/closing door (not shown) for opening/closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, the first special winning opening 91 performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs in the first game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first big winning opening 91 is a first big winning detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first big opening/closing drive for the first opening/closing door. The winning opening solenoid 80 is provided. Of these, the first big winning detection device 78 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning opening 91, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

The above-mentioned second special winning opening 92 is provided as a special winning opening corresponding to the second game, and has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the second special winning opening 92 includes a second opening/closing door (not shown) for opening/closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, the second special winning opening 92 performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs in the second game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second big winning opening 92 is a second big winning detection device 79 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second big opening/closing drive for the second opening/closing door. The winning opening solenoid 81 is provided. Of these, the second big winning detection device 79 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning opening 91, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

In this embodiment, decorative plates 91b and 92b are provided in front of the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92, respectively. The decorative plates 91b and 92b are made of a transparent material so that the player can visually recognize the first opening/closing door, the second opening/closing door, the first big winning opening 91, and the second big winning opening 92. However, the decorative plates 91b and 92b may be opaque. Further, characters or figures for decorating the game area 52 may be drawn on each decorative plate, but in this case as well, characters or figures are displayed in the first big winning opening 91 or the second big winning opening 92. It is desirable that it does not interfere with the visibility of the game balls that have entered.

As described above, the left operation port 68a includes a left passage detection device 69a, and the right operation port 68b includes a right passage detection device 69b. Further, these passage detection devices 69a, 69b have sensors for detecting passage of the game ball through the corresponding operating ports 68a, 68b. The output signals of the sensors of the passage detecting devices 69a and 69b are input to the main board 102, and the passage detecting devices 69a and 69b change the output signals of the sensors according to the presence/absence of a ball.

The center decoration 64 described above has a function of production and the like, and inside the center decoration 64, an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided. By driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED transmits through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs the light decoration.

The center decoration 64 is provided with movable effect members 93, 94 and the like, and these movable effect members 93, 94 constitute a gimmick for effect. Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has the function of the flow path of the game ball in addition to the above-mentioned effect function. Have Further, the effect display device 60 is provided behind the center decoration 64, and the display screen of the effect display device 60 can be visually recognized through the center decoration 64 in the approximate center of the game area 52.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 described above has a large number of 7-segment display bodies and LED indicators arranged on a symbol display substrate (main symbol display substrate) 256. This main control display device 53, the normal symbol display unit 59 for displaying the above-mentioned normal symbol, the first special symbol display unit 70 for displaying the first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, the second game The second special symbol display portion 71 for displaying the second special symbol (described later) corresponding to, and other various display portions are formed. The normal symbol display unit 59 described above constitutes a normal symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes the second special symbol display device. The details of each display unit formed on the main control display device 53 will be described later.

In addition, in the following, the ordinary symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "first special symbol" or "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol is "second special symbol". It may be referred to as a "special figure 2" or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".
<Basic game procedure>

Subsequently, a game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20 in a situation where the game balls are supplied to the upper ball plate 18, the upper ball plate 18 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in 1 are shot one by one at a predetermined interval. Then, the game ball is guided by the inner rail and the outer rail described above, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

In a normal game, the player shoots so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located in the lower center part of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is called so-called left hitting. Further, the firing of the game balls is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the above-described launching device 43 while the player operates the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously emitted to the game area 52 drop in a direction according to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or the reflection angle) while interfering with the plurality of game nails and the windmill.

When the game ball falls into various prize holes such as the above-described general prize hole 72 and the first start prize hole 62, the game ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed as described later. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls through the payout unit 35 according to the type of the winning opening that entered. Moreover, when the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the paid out subsequent game balls cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. ..

In addition, the game balls that have fallen into the various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front surface side to the back surface side of the game board 50. In addition, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port 58, and is guided to the back surface side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball reaching the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter and a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the side of the island facility described above. Is discharged.

The above-mentioned left operation port 68a and right operation port 68b are gates through which game balls pass, unlike the above-mentioned winning holes that generate safe balls. In the following, the left operating port 68a and the right operating port 68b are collectively referred to as a "winning hole", and the terms "drop", "ball", and "winning" in the present embodiment refer to "passing" related to a gate. It has meaning.

When a game ball enters the operating port (here, the left operating port 68a or the right operating port 68b), if a predetermined fluctuation start condition (universal figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied, the main control On the display device 53, normal symbols (described later) are variably displayed. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of random number lottery (universal figure lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operation opening, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined change time. It Then, when the result of the universal drawing is a win, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, and when the result of the ordinary drawing is a win, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed in a defective manner. It The details of the ordinary drawing lottery and ordinary symbols will be described later.

When the game ball enters the starting opening (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. For example, on the main control display device 53, special symbols (described later) are variably displayed. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of the random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting opening, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined change time. .. Then, when the result of the random number lottery is a big hit, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit, and when the result of the random number lottery is absent, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of a loss.

The details of the big hit lottery and special symbols will be described later. In addition, when there is a ball in the starting opening (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), it is possible to output a specific sound effect, light the starting opening, or the like. ..

In the above-mentioned effect display device 60, effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display is different in whether the special symbol is being variably displayed or being stopped, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or a disappointing one. Relatedly, effects of various predetermined modes are performed. When the result of the big hit lottery is out of order, the display on the main control display device 53 shifts from the stop display of the special symbol to the variable display relating to the next lottery result. Furthermore, the effect performed on the effect display device 60 is also related to the next lottery result after the stop display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, after the stop display of the special symbol and the effect display related to the big hit, a special game that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game (normal game) Move to. Then, in this special game, the above-mentioned special winning opening (the first special winning opening 91 or the second special winning opening 92) is opened and closed. In this embodiment, when a big hit is generated based on a ball entering the first starting winning opening 62, the first big winning opening 91 is opened and closed, and a big hit is generated based on entering a second starting winning opening 63. When it does, the 2nd special winning opening 92 opens and closes.

In the special game, a unit game in which the first big winning opening 91 or the second big winning opening 92 is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, in the special game, there are one in which the unit game is repeated the maximum number of times and one in which the unit game is repeated less than the maximum number of times. The maximum number of times may be 16 times (16R (round)), and the number of times less than the maximum number may be 4 times (4R).

In the present embodiment, these types of special games correspond to the types of big hits, but the concrete types of big hits will be described later. Further, in each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are detected at the corresponding special winning opening (first special winning opening 91 or second special winning opening 92), or open. When a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, the ending condition is satisfied and the corresponding special winning opening is closed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game property in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed is adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of games are the first operation in which the left operation opening 68a, the first start winning opening 62, and the first big winning opening 91 are used, and the right operation opening 68b, the second starting. It can be divided into a winning game 63 and a second game in which the second special winning hole 92 is used. Then, the second game is prioritized (priority control) over the first game, and the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. Here, the details of the game nature in which the second game is prioritized over the first game will be described later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game depending on the result of the above-mentioned big hit lottery. This specific game is in a mode different from the special game described above, and is in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as "probable variation"), a variation time reduction game (hereinafter referred to as "time saving"), and a ball entry facilitation game are provided as specific games. Further, in this embodiment, a so-called right hitting is performed during which the game ball is shot toward the right side of the game area 52 during this specific game. The details of these specific games will be described later.

When the specific game is executed, a right-handed effect is executed by an image or sound of the effect display device 60. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and shoots the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center ornament 64 , Enter the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64, and flow down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center decoration 64 hits a plurality of game nails and other structures and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting.

A part of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 passes through the right operation port 68b (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the right passage detecting device 69b (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the right actuation port 68b, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6(a)) for a predetermined time, and the variable symbol of the normal symbol is displayed. When stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the ordinary electric winning accessory of the second start winning opening 63 is opened for a predetermined time, and electric choo support during the specific game is executed.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the vicinity of the second start winning opening 63 and the second big winning opening 92 by a nail or the like, and the second starting. When the ordinary electric accessory of the winning opening 63 is expanded once, in most cases, one game ball can be inserted into the second starting winning opening 63 depending on the situation. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving is added during the specific game, and during the time saving, the extension of the normal electric accessory is performed and the aforementioned long opening is executed.

Further, since the second special winning opening 92 is arranged on the right side of the game area 52 as described above, even when a big hit related to the second game occurs and the second special winning opening 92 opens, the player does not It is necessary to perform the above-mentioned right-handed striking at the second big winning opening 92.

When the big hit of the first game occurs and the special game related to the first game is executed, the first special winning opening 91 is opened, but during the special game related to the first game, the player It is possible to make a right-hand strike for. Then, in this case, before the special game relating to the first game is started, it is conceivable to execute an effect that prompts the player to make a right-handed hit, by using an image or sound of the effect display device 60. Further, it is also possible to adopt a board surface structure for guiding the game ball hit to the right to the first special winning opening 91, or a board surface structure for arranging the first special winning opening 91 on the right side of the game area 52. Further, it is also possible to integrate the first special winning opening 91 with the second special winning opening 92, and adopt a board surface configuration in which the second special winning opening 92 is the only big winning opening.

Further, the game ball passage portion 65 through which the game ball hit to the right flows down may not be provided in the center decoration 64, but may be secured outside the center decoration 64, for example. In this case, at the time of right hitting, the game ball passes through the right outside of the center ornament 64 toward the area in which the right operating port 68b and the second special winning opening 92 are arranged. It is also possible to adopt a board surface configuration in which the game ball passage portion 65 in the center decoration 64 and the game ball flow passage formed on the right outside of the center decoration 64 coexist.
<Type of jackpot>

Next, the types of big hits in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be described. First, in the present embodiment, as a big hit, a big hit that repeats the above unit game 16 times (hereinafter also referred to as "16R big hit" as appropriate) or a big hit that repeats the unit game 4 times (hereinafter also appropriately referred to as "4R big hit") Is provided. The lottery modes for these jackpots will be described later.

The unit game described above is started with the opening of the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) in the special game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed, or the first big winning. The game ends when a predetermined number (eg, 9 or more) of game balls fall into the winning opening 91 (or the second winning opening 92), and the first winning opening 91 (or the second winning opening 92) is closed. To do. The special game in which such a unit game is repeated is basically a game accompanied by a so-called ball hit with the aim of causing the player to obtain a game ball. Further, among various jackpots, the 16R jackpot, the 4R jackpot, and the like are intended to cause the player to obtain a relatively large number of game balls.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide, for example, a 16R jackpot or a part of the 16R jackpot, which does not become a definite change (16R regular or 4R regular), as one type of jackpot. Further, for example, even in the case of a 16R jackpot, the opening period of the first jackpot 91 (or the second jackpot 92) is short, and the player can obtain only the same amount of balls as the 4R jackpot (16R jackpot). It is possible to provide a certain variation (actual 4R), or to provide a 4R jackpot that hardly allows the player to get a ball (4R no ball).

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific game states such as the above-mentioned probability change and time saving occur for all 16R big hits and some 4R big hits. That is, all the 16R jackpots in this embodiment are 16R jackpots accompanied by a probability variation (hereinafter referred to as "16R probability variation"). Further, the 4R jackpot in the present embodiment includes a 4R jackpot with a probability variation (hereinafter referred to as "4R probability variation") and a 4R jackpot without a probability variation (hereinafter referred to as "4R normal variation").

However, the combination of the big hit and the probability change, the shortening of time, etc. is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, it is possible to provide a jackpot that does not give at least a part of the privilege functions such as probability change, time saving, and easy entry game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a certain change or a big hit with only a shortened time. Further, it is also possible to make different types of jackpots depending on the difference in the probability variation duration and the difference in the time saving duration. In addition, in the case where the electric choo support is also executed during the time saving, the “time saving duration” can be rephrased as the “electrical chewing support duration”. Further, it may be possible to execute only Den Chu support of the time saving and Den Chu support.
<Hits other than big hits>

Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a kind of hit other than the big hit. When the small hit occurs in the first game (or the second game), the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is opened once. The lottery mode for the small hit will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<<Configuration of main control display device>>

Next, the main control display device 53 described above will be described with reference to FIG. The main control display device 53 is configured by arranging a segment display body and a large number of LED display lamps on a symbol display board 256 and stacking a transparent plate in front of various display bodies. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 includes a first state indicator light 231 and a second state indicator light 232 in the upper left portion of the symbol display board 256 when viewed from the front, in order from the left. , And has a main control error indicator light 233.

The first status indicator light 231 is configured by arranging two linear LED segments in a line in an upward right direction to form a digit in the form of the numeral "1". The second status indicator light 232 is a combination of seven linear LED segments to form a digit in the form of the numeral "8". Further, the main control error indicating lamp 233 is composed of a perfect circular main control error indicating lamp dot attached to the lower right of the second state indicating lamp 232.

The first state indicator light 231 and the second state indicator light 232 described above are capable of displaying numbers 0 to 18, alphabet letters, hyphens and other symbols by selectively turning on the LED of each segment. Has become. Further, it is possible to display a wider variety of information by blinking the LEDs and different blinking patterns. Then, the first state indicator light 231 and the second state indicator light 232 are used, for example, for displaying the number of rounds when a big game occurs in the above-mentioned first game or second game and a special game is executed. .. Further, the main control error indicator lamp 233 can be used, for example, for displaying an error.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, on the symbol display board 256, 2, 4, 10, and 10 LED indicator lights are laterally arranged at a predetermined pitch from the top. Then, these 26 LED indicators in total are the remaining parts with respect to the parts on which the first status indicator 231, the second status indicator 232, and the main control error indicator 233 are arranged on the symbol display board 256. They are arranged neatly. Here, in FIG. 6A, the symbols A to Z are described on a total of 26 LED indicator lights for convenience of description. Then, in the following description, the LED indicators may be distinguished by the reference numerals A to Z attached in FIG.

These LED indicator lights A to Z can also display predetermined information according to the presence or absence of lighting and a blinking pattern. FIG. 6B shows the relationship between the LED indicators A to Z shown in FIG. 6A and the names. Among these, the LED indicators A to C are a first LED for normal symbol storage display, a second LED for normal symbol storage display, and a normal symbol display LED, which are related to a normal symbol described later. Further, the LED indicator lights D and E are a third state indicator light and a fourth state indicator light, and the LED indicator light F is a right-handing instruction light that is turned on, for example, when the above-mentioned right-handing should be performed. Of these, the third state indicator light (D) is used to display the operating state of the probability variation function related to the special symbol, the fourth state indicator light (E) is the operating state of the probability variation function related to the normal symbol Used to display.

Further, the eight LED indicator lights G to N constitute the first special symbol display portion 70, and the LED indicator lights O and P are the first special symbol memory display first LED and the first special symbol memory, respectively. It is the second LED for display. Further, the eight LED indicator lights Q to X constitute the second special symbol display section 71, and the LED indicator lights Y and Z are the first special symbol memory display LED for the second special symbol and the second special symbol memory, respectively. It is the second LED for display. In addition, in FIG. 6(a), since the normal symbol display portion 59, the first special symbol display portion 70, and the second special symbol display portion 71 are denoted by reference numerals, each LED indicator light is enclosed by a symbol of curly brackets. Is shown.

The above-mentioned normal symbol display portion 59 is configured by one LED indicator light C, and the operation mode of this LED indicator light C is adapted to perform the variable display and the stop display of the ordinary symbol. In addition, as the operation of the normal symbol display unit 59, it is possible to distinguish and display a large number (for example, 3 or more) of kinds of information by the difference in lighting and blinking, the difference in blinking period, and the like. From the viewpoint of clarity regarding the stop display of the ordinary symbols, it is desirable to display the lottery result regarding the ordinary symbols by turning on or off. For this reason, the number of LED indicator lights constituting the normal symbol display portion 59 may be set to, for example, two or more, and a combination of lighting and extinguishing may represent a stop symbol of the normal symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed by blinking one LED indicator light C. However, for example, when the normal symbol display section is configured by two LED indicators, one LED is turned on and the other LED is turned off (represented by "●○"), one LED is turned off and the other LED is turned off. Is lit up (represented by "○●"), alternately blinking "●○", "○●", "●○", "○●",... It is possible to carry out. The display mode of the normal symbols using the two LEDs will be described later as another embodiment. Furthermore, in the case of such blinking by alternating lighting of two patterns, it is difficult to visually recognize the variation depending on the timing (interval) of pattern switching. Therefore, "○○ (all lights off)", "●● (all lights) , And three patterns or four patterns may be displayed. However, if "●●" is sandwiched, it may be easily affected by afterglow and the change may be difficult to be visually recognized. Therefore, the three patterns in which only the "○○" pattern is added are preferable.

The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol relating to the first game by the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights G to N arranged in a line in the lateral direction. Has become. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and its variable display is predetermined. When it is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 70, at the time of the stop display of the first special symbol, is a maximum of 256 (=2^8) types depending on the combination of turning on and off of the LED indicator lights G to N. The identification information can be displayed.

Similarly for the above-mentioned second special symbol display portion 71, the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol relating to the second game by the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights Q to X lined up in a row in the lateral direction. Is possible. The second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 71 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 63, and its variable display is predetermined. When stopped in a hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. Even in the second special symbol display portion 71, at the time of the stop display of the second special symbol, a maximum of 256 (=2^8) types is obtained by combining the turning on and off of the LED indicator lights Q to X. The identification information of can be displayed.

The main control display device 53 having such a configuration is connected to the above-mentioned main substrate 102, as shown in FIG. The various display portions of the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In FIG. 3, among the various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<<Functions of main control display device>>

When the game ball passes through the above-described operating port (left operating port 68a or right operating port 68b), the normal symbol display portion 59 blinks, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined variation time (general figure variation time) has elapsed since the variation display of the ordinary symbol was started, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. And, if the normal pattern is displayed in the off mode (out mode), if there is a ball entering the subsequent working port after the elapse of a predetermined stop time (normal time stop fixed time), The next variable display related to the design is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the transition to the next variable display is performed in the same manner as in the case of a hit, while the normal symbol that was previously stopped and displayed is hit. According to the aspect, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

Also, the first LED for normal symbol memory display and the second LED for normal symbol memory display, which are the LED indicator lights A and B, form a set of two, and 0 to 0 depending on the combination of turning off and lighting the two LEDs. The number of 4 can be displayed. Then, the numerical value displayed by the first LED for normal symbol storage display (C) and the second LED for normal symbol storage display (D) represents the number of holdings related to the general symbol lottery in the first game or the second game. ..

The number of holdings related to this universal symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the left operating port 68a (or the right operating port 68b) during the variation of the regular symbol, and the regular symbol that the variable display of the regular symbol has not been executed yet. Shows the number of times the lottery is held. In other words, if the symbol variation that has been performed earlier has not ended, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation ends, the variation start condition is satisfied and the lottery result that has been stored on hold ( Based on the pending lottery result), a new symbol fluctuation will be started. The upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and the number of reservation storages is set to not exceed four.

Normal symbol memory display for the first LED (C) and normal symbol memory display for the second LED (D), the display of the numerical value of 0 to 4, for example, when the number of holding is 0 (when there is no holding) both off However, when the number of holdings is 1, it is possible to perform such a mode that one of them is turned on and the other is turned off. When the number of holdings is 2, both are turned on, when the number of holdings is 3, one of them is turned on and the other is blinked, and when the number of holdings is 4, both of them are blinked. Can be displayed. In addition, if the number of LEDs for displaying the number of reserved figures for general-purpose figures (the same is true for the number of reserved figures for special figures to be described later) is the same as the upper limit number of reservations (four here), control such as blinking is unnecessary. .. However, as in the present embodiment, by setting the number of LEDs for displaying the number of holdings to be less than the upper limit number of holdings (two in this case), the member cost is reduced, and further blink control is performed. Since the light-off period is provided, power consumption can be suppressed.

Regarding the display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70, the first special symbol memory display first LED (O) and the first special symbol memory display second LED (P) are two Is set as one set and the numerical values of 0 to 4 are displayed. Regarding the display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the second special symbol display unit 71, the first LED (Y) for the second special symbol memory display and the second LED for the second special symbol memory display (Z) are two 1 It is performed by displaying numerical values of 0 to 4 as a set.

In the present embodiment, the second game is preferentially executed as described above, so that for the first special symbol, all the symbol variations corresponding to the reserved lottery result of the second special symbol are finished, and the reserved lottery result. The fact that all have been digested is also a condition for starting fluctuation of the first special symbol. And the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each as an upper limit, and the reserved storage in each is such that it does not exceed four.

1st special symbol memory display 1st LED (O) and 1st special symbol memory display 2nd LED (P), or 2nd special symbol memory display 1st LED (Y) and 2nd special symbol memory display 2nd LED The display of the numerical value of 0 to 4 by (Z) is, for example, the same as in the case of the first LED (A) for the normal symbol storage display and the second LED (B) for the normal symbol storage display, the number of holdings is 0. In the case (there is no hold), both can be turned off, and when the number of holds is 1, either one can be turned on and the other can be turned off. When the number of holdings is 2, both are turned on, when the number of holdings is 3, one of them is turned on and the other is blinked, and when the number of holdings is 4, both of them are blinked. Can be displayed.

Note that when the game situation in which the above-mentioned right-handedness is to be performed is reached, display is performed in a predetermined manner using the right-handedness indicator light F of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A). In this embodiment, the operation pattern of the right-handing instruction light F is set so that the right-handing instruction light F is turned off when left-handed, which is a game situation where left-handedness should be left, and turned on when right-handed, which is a game situation where right-handedness is required. For example, lighting or blinking) is set.
<Structure of display device and basic display contents>

Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, as the effect display device 60, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 described above, and other effect display such as story display are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, the basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, on the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. The variable display of the design 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect design 190 is composed of a left effect design 190a, a middle effect design 190b, and a right effect design 190c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left effect design 190a has nine types of element designs (symbol element effect designs) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "9". And, the middle effect design 190b and the right effect design 190c, which are other effect symbols, also have nine types of element symbols meaning the numbers "1" to "9", like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above-mentioned elemental designs will be described later.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7A). In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the effect symbols, the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and the above-described element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Executed by.

Further, the effect design 190 may form a so-called “reach” combination as an intermediate stage of variable display. In this "reach", among the effect symbols 190, two effect symbols (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same numbers, such as "7" and "7", and the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining 1 symbol (here, medium symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the reach combination cannot be configured in combination with another effect symbol, and is changing. Has become.

As the display mode of the effect design 190, various types of “reach” and other various modes can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effect by the effect pattern 190, and details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses the liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be one. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the main control display device 53 which is a display device different from the effect display device 60. The special display may be displayed on the effect display device 60 without displaying the design. In this case, it becomes possible to give the special symbol itself a directing role.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 on the effect display device 60 is adapted to be shared by the first game and the second game. For this reason, the current effect symbol 190 may be displayed to indicate which special symbol of the first game and the second game is being displayed. Such a display for distinguishing the first game and the second game is performed, for example, at any corner of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 or for distinguishing the center decoration 64 described above. It is conceivable to add an LED indicator light to display an identification mark for distinguishing between the first game and the second game. Further, the effect symbol for the first game and the effect symbol for the second game may be separately provided, and both effect symbols may be simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 60.

Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one including only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies. More specifically, as the effect display device 60 shown in FIG. 1, as described above, a display screen having a relatively large display screen (for example, a size of about 15 inches) is used, and a relatively small display screen is used. It is conceivable to add one or more (for example, a 5-inch size). Here, the large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and the small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal".

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In this case, it is conceivable that the additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.

Further, the additional display body is provided with a multi-monitor function, and a combined image is formed by combining the display content of the display area 194 and the display content of the additional display body. It is also possible to combine additional display bodies in front of the display area 194 to form one display body in a pseudo manner. Furthermore, when an additional display body is arranged in front of the display area 194, the display content of the display area 194 hidden by the additional display body can be displayed on the additional display body to supplement it. is there.

In addition, a relatively large display body may be allowed to move back and forth, for example. Further, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display device is arranged in front of the effect display device 60, and when a predetermined effect pattern is executed, the display content of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is superimposed on the display content of the effect display device 60. It is also possible.
<Electrical structure of Pachinko game machine>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main ones of the electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the above-mentioned payout control board 103 and the like, and the payout control board 103 is provided with a main board 102, a launching device 43, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board (not shown). ) Etc. are connected. Further, the main control display device 53 and the sub main substrate 301 described above are connected to the main substrate 102, and the sub sub substrate 302 described above is connected to the sub main substrate 301.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. Further, although not shown, the payout control board 103 is also connected to a status display unit used for displaying the type of error, a monetary process relating to a ball lending, a card unit for executing a ball lending process, and the like. .. Further, a ball coin operating board or the like used for ball coin operation is connected to the above-mentioned game ball lending device connection terminal plate (not shown). Further, a touch switch (not shown) and a firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIG. 1) are connected to the firing device 43 described above.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control display device 53, respective passage detection devices 69a and 69b, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76, and a first board are provided on the main board 102 via various game board connection boards (not shown). Starting winning detection device 74, second starting winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, first big winning detection device 78, second big winning detection device 79, first big winning opening solenoid 80, second big winning opening solenoid 81, a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor (not shown), etc. are connected.

Each device for performance is connected to the sub-main substrate 301 via various relay substrates (not shown). As the respective devices for performance, there are LED boards for various electric decorations in the center decoration 64, various movable body motors for the movable performance members 93 and 94, LED boards for electric decorations in the gaming machine frame 11, and the gaming machine frame 11. The provided frame motor and the like for performance can be exemplified. Here, examples of the illumination on the gaming machine frame 11 include those performed on the glass door 15 described above, those performed on the dish unit 16, and those performed on the button device provided with the operation buttons 22. .. The frame motor described above is used to drive a movable effect member (not shown) provided in the gaming machine frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal unit 42 included in the effect display device 60, various speakers 21, and the like are connected to the sub-sub substrate 302. The various speakers 21 may be connected to the sub main board 301 described above.

Next, the configurations of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The "ROM" and "RWM" described in the present embodiment are a comprehensive concept including both the one built in the CPU device and the one externally attached to the CPU device.

Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number. A random number circuit for Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main board 102 is provided with an input/output port 505 for inputting/outputting data to/from a device outside the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The above-mentioned ROM 502 stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform a game-related process, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 503 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501.

Next, on the payout control board 103, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform payout processing, predetermined control data, and the like. The RWM 513 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the CPU 501 executes the payout program.

The sub-main substrate 301 described above includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. .. The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main board 102, and the output side of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like.

The CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RWM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is the memory of.

Data transmission/reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) mode from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since one-way communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301. In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, a communication restricting means (buffer circuit etc.) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is controlled by this communication restricting means. Can be done through.

The sub-sub-board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a sound ROM 534, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, a sound control circuit 537, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). Equipped with. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The input side of the input port 538 is connected to the output side of the sub-main substrate 301, and the output side of the input port 538 is connected to each of the devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing the display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content of the effect display device 60 (frame image ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the effect display device 60 is caused to display the symbols by superimposing the symbols in the order of the layers whose priorities are determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

The power supply board 251 described above includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies a necessary operating voltage to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside and supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc., to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. And supply to other specified equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 is an initialization signal for clearing the backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by the manager of the game store when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a circuit for outputting. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) the stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the above initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the data (backup data) backed up in the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 are returned. Cleared.

Note that the initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103 so that the backed up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. You may Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data for the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with the backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a is a stack pointer at the time of power shutdown when the power is shut down (when a power failure occurs) due to the occurrence of a power failure (including a so-called momentary power failure that is a power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). , An area for storing values of each register, I/O, and the like. Then, along with the normal power-on and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area 503a.

The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is cut off by the power-off processing (described later), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is executed in the control start processing when the power is turned on (described later). As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply.

As for the RWM 513 in the payout control board 103, similarly to the RWM 503 in the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, so that data can be retained (backup). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a is for storing the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown, each register, the value of I/O, etc., when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like (when the power is interrupted). Area. Then, as the power is normally turned on or the power failure is resolved, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power was shut down based on the information in the backup area 513a.

The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power-off processing in the payout control board 103, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the control start processing in the payout control board 103 when the power is turned on. To be done. As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main board 102, an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power source can be used.

The main board 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power interruption due to the above-described power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the voltage of DC stable (for example, 30 V) which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251, and the voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption) is detected and the above-mentioned power interruption signal is output. Based on the input of such a power interruption signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power interruption process.

It should be noted that the electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like are such that, even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than a predetermined voltage at which the power cutoff signal is output, a sufficient time is required to execute a predetermined process such as a power-off process. During this period, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, without being limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be separately supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 in different systems. You may do it.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a portion other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251, and the power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each board on the power supply board 251. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the function of the power supply board 251 may be allowed to be exhibited by the main board 102. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main board 102.

Further, the power outage monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output an electric power interruption signal and perform a power interruption process based on the electric power interruption signal. Further, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 so that the power interruption signal is transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the above-mentioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, etc. are provided with NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminals. In addition, as a trigger for executing the above-described power-off process, a hardware-like one that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. There is software-like one that checks the power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected in the periodic interrupt processing based on the setting.

In the present embodiment, the power-off process is performed based on the hardware-like trigger of NMI. Then, the signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting the power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal may occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs the power interruption signal but also when noise is mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. It should be noted that the transition to the power-off processing can be performed based on a software method as described later as another embodiment. It is also possible to set a power-off flag based on the power-off signal input to the NMI terminal and use it as a trigger for executing the power-off process.
<Basic functions of main board>

Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of the present embodiment fulfills various functions such as entry determination, lottery, command transmission, etc. by the functions of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the main board 102 can be understood as having functional means (described later) for performing these various functions. Similarly, the sub-main substrate 301, the sub-sub substrate 302, and the like, which are other control substrates, are also provided with functional means for performing various functions.

FIG. 5 shows typical functional means in each of the main substrate 102, the sub-main substrate 301, and the sub-sub substrate 302. Of these, the main board 102, the entrance determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the universal figure lottery means 113, the hold control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, It is provided with specific game control means 117, opening/closing control means 118, prior information notifying means 119, main command transmitting means 120, and the like. Then, the main board 102, by these functional means, as will be described below in order, a lottery for special symbols, a lottery for normal symbols, a hold control, a main control display, a special game, a specific game, opening and closing control, prior information. Execute notification etc.
<<Successful lottery function for special symbols>>

The above-mentioned winning determination means 110 determines whether or not a game ball has entered each winning opening (each operating opening, various starting winning openings, various special winning openings, general winning openings, etc.). More specifically, the ball determining unit 110 receives passage information when the game ball passes through the left operating port 68a (or the right operating port 68b), and the game ball receives the left operating port 68a (or the right operating port 68b). ) Is judged to have passed. Furthermore, the ball determination means 110 receives the first start winning information (or the second starting winning information) when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 62 (or the second starting winning opening 63), and the game is played. It is determined that the ball has entered the first start winning opening 62 (or the second starting winning opening 63).

Further, the winning determination means 110, when the game ball enters the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92), the first big winning opening winning information (or the second big winning opening winning information). It is determined that the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92). Furthermore, the ball determination means 110 receives the general winning information when the game ball enters the general winning opening 72, and determines that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 72.

The above-mentioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery corresponding to the entry into the first starting winning opening 62. That is, the first lottery means 111 has the functions of the first lottery value acquisition means 121, the first winning/disagreement determination means 122, the first symbol determination means 123, and the first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A). Note that each functional means such as the first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 will be described later.

Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery corresponding to the entry into the second starting winning opening 63. That is, the second lottery means 112 has the functions of the second lottery value acquisition means 125, the second winning/discarding determination means 126, the second symbol determination means 127, and the second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display portion 71 of the main control display device 53 described above. Each functional means such as the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 will be described later.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the above-mentioned first lottery means 111 sets the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery to the first winning/winning lottery value upon the entry into the first starting winning opening 62. To get as. In addition, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above causes the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery to be the second winning/losing result when the player enters the second starting winning opening 63. Obtain as a lottery value.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number obtained as the first winning/winning lottery value and the jackpot random number obtained as the second winning/winning lottery value are generated by the two-stage random number generating means. More specifically, the random numbers used in the jackpot lottery are generated by an operation (addition) using the above hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit can be used. As the software random number, it is possible to use a value updated every interruption by a random number generation program in software. Note that either one of the hardware random number and the software random number may be used. The details of the hardware random number and the software random number will be described later.

The first win/loss determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a win/fail determination based on the first win/loss lottery value, and whether or not the first win/win lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (hit value) for winning. To judge. Similarly, the second win/loss determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 performs win/loss determination based on the above-mentioned second win/loss lottery value, and the second win/loss lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) to be a win. Determine whether it is applicable. In the win/loss determination by the first win/loss determination means 122 and the second win/loss determination means 126, a win/loss determination table that defines correspondence between the first win/win lottery value and the second win/win lottery value and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is used. The details of the hit/miss determination table will be described later.
<<Design lottery function related to special symbols>>

Next, the symbol lottery by the above-mentioned first symbol determining means 123 and second symbol determining means 127 will be described. First, the first symbol determination means 123, when one of the big hits in the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol is won, the type of the first special symbol, the big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery (Fig. 8 ( a))). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the first symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the type of the first special symbol.

Here, the first symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a "special symbol per symbol random number" or "symbol random number" or the like related to the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of winning includes a small hit, the first symbol determination means 123, in the case of winning the small hit in the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol, the type of the first special symbol Is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C). In addition, the first symbol determination means 123 determines the type of the first special symbol in the case of deviation in the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol, based on the deficit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9(d)).

The first symbol lottery value is acquired upon the entry of the ball into the first starting winning opening 62, as in the case of the first winning/discarding lottery value described above. Further, the type of the first special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and is associated with the acquired first symbol lottery value so that the type of big hit and the presence or absence of small hit are determined. That is, the first symbol lottery value is acquired upon the entry into the first start winning hole 62, and at a predetermined timing, based on the jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery, corresponding to the first symbol lottery value. 1 Special symbol and the type of winning are determined. The details of the jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery will be described later.

The above-mentioned second symbol determining means 127 is a type of the second special symbol in the case of winning in any of the jackpot lottery related to the second special symbol, the type of the second special symbol, the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery (Fig. 9 ( Refer to b)). The big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, like the above big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, the second symbol lottery value that is a random number value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the second special symbol. It defines the relationship with types.

Here, the second symbol lottery value may also be referred to as “special symbol per symbol random number” or “symbol random number” related to the second special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of winning includes a small hit, the second symbol determination means 127, in the case of winning the small hit in the big hit lottery related to the second special symbol, the type of the second special symbol Is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C). Further, the second symbol determination means 127 determines the type of the second special symbol in the case of deviation in the jackpot lottery related to the second special symbol, based on the outfall symbol determination table (see FIG. 9(d)). In addition, also about the 2nd symbol determination means 127, you may make it have a 1st symbol and a 2nd symbol corresponding to a 1st symbol, and 1st symbol determination means 123 and 2nd symbol determination means 127, respectively. You may make it have the Nth out-of-range design (N is a natural number greater than or equal to 1) including the 3rd or more out-of-place design. In these cases as well, it is possible to apply the notice processing mode and notice effect pattern for the second deviation relating to special figure 1 described later.

The second symbol lottery value is acquired upon the entry of the ball into the second start winning port 63, as in the case of the above-mentioned second win/loss lottery value. Further, the type of the second special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and is associated with the acquired second symbol lottery value so that the type of big hit and the presence or absence of small hit are determined. That is, the second symbol lottery value is acquired upon the entry into the second start winning hole 63, and at a predetermined timing, based on the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery, the second symbol lottery value corresponding to the second symbol lottery value. 2 Special symbols and types of jackpots are decided. The details of the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the type of symbol is determined based on the symbol random number provided separately from the jackpot random number, but is not limited to this. However, for example, the type of the special symbol may be previously associated with the big hit random number, and the type of the special symbol may be determined based on the value of the obtained big hit random number.
<<Variable pattern lottery function related to special symbols>>

Next, the variation pattern lottery by the above-mentioned first pattern determining means 124 and second pattern determining means 128 will be described. First, the first pattern determination means 124 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 based on the special symbol variation pattern table (described later). Further, the special figure fluctuation pattern table defines a relationship between a large number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a first pattern lottery value which is a random number value (fluctuation pattern random number) related to the fluctuation pattern determination of the first special symbol.

The first pattern lottery value is acquired upon the entry of the ball into the first starting winning port 62, as in the case of the first winning/discarding lottery value described above. Further, the second pattern lottery value is acquired upon the entry of the ball into the second starting winning opening 63, as in the case of the above-mentioned second win/loss lottery value. Furthermore, the variation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, for example, a difference in various game situations such as a big hit, a missed time, the presence/absence of a reach, the extent of the reach development, the presence/absence of a shortening time, and the number of holdings. A plurality of determinants are provided for each. Further, in this embodiment, the total number of fluctuation patterns reaches about 100.

Furthermore, each variation pattern is associated with the first pattern lottery value and the second pattern lottery value, and is associated with the acquired first pattern lottery value and second pattern lottery value, and changes according to the situation of the game. The pattern is settled. That is, the first pattern lottery value is acquired when the first start winning port 62 is entered, and the second pattern lottery value is acquired when the second start winning port 63 is entered. Then, at a predetermined timing, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation is determined.

The variation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, for example, from about 1 second to several minutes depending on its type. That is, in each special figure variation pattern, the variation time is set as the end condition of the variation display, and in the above-mentioned first special symbol display section 70 or second special symbol display section 71 (see FIG. 6(a)). The variable display of the special symbol is started, and when the specified variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Note that the relationship between the length of the fluctuation time in various special figure fluctuation patterns is not necessarily uniformly determined according to the game situation. That is, with regard to the special figure variation pattern, the variation time may be common to different types of special figure variation patterns. Further, even in the special figure variation patterns defined for different game situations, the variation times may be common to each other. Furthermore, as for the special figure variation pattern, the variation time of the variation pattern that is the selection target when the time is short may be longer than the variation time of the variation pattern that is the selection target when the time is not short.

More specifically, many of the special figure fluctuation patterns that are selected when the time is short are set to have shorter fluctuation times than the special figure fluctuation patterns that are selected when the time is not short. However, in the present embodiment, for example, a special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the number of holdings is 4 in a non-time saving time, compared to a specific special figure fluctuation pattern in a time saving time, The short ones are included.
<<Various lottery functions related to ordinary symbols>>

Next, the above-mentioned general drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The universal figure lottery means 113 has a universal figure lottery value acquisition means 129, a universal figure appropriateness determination means 130, a universal symbol determination means 131, and a universal figure pattern determination means 132. Then, the universal figure lottery means 113, when the passage of the game ball in each of the operating ports 68a, 68b is detected by the above-mentioned ball entry determination means 110, based on the detection result, the lottery related to the ordinary symbol (common figure lottery) ) Is executed.

In this public figure lottery, the public figure lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires the public figure lottery value which is a random number (normal figure random number) relating to the ordinary symbol, and the public figure determination table 131 makes the public figure determination table. Referenced. In this universal figure determination table, the corresponding relationship between the universal figure lottery value and the type of ordinary symbol is defined. Then, the universal figure appropriateness determination means 130 determines whether or not the ordinary symbol associated with the universal figure lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it hits, determines the type of a hit. To be done.

Further, the universal figure pattern determining means 132 determines a variation pattern (normal figure variation pattern) related to the ordinary symbol. Each public figure fluctuation pattern is associated with a public figure pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to the public figure fluctuation pattern (public figure fluctuation pattern random number), and is linked to the acquired public figure pattern lottery value to determine the game situation. The universal pattern variation pattern is set according to. In other words, the universal figure pattern lottery value is acquired upon the entry of the ball into the left operating port 68a or the right operating port 68b, and at a predetermined timing, based on the universal pattern variation pattern table, the universal pattern variation pattern corresponding to the situation of the game. Is determined. The normal variation pattern is provided for each determinant element corresponding to various game situation differences, such as a hit time, a missed time, a kind of hit, presence/absence of time saving, and the like.

The universal figure variation pattern defines the time (variation time) from the variation start to the variation in the regular symbol variation display. And, in the non-time saving game state, the universal figure variation pattern defines some variation times such as 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds and 10 seconds depending on the type. On the other hand, in accordance with the time saving game state of the special symbol, the time variation game is also a time saving game, and in the time saving state, the time variation state is defined as a time period of several hundred milliseconds to several seconds. That is, in each general pattern fluctuation pattern, the variable time is defined as the end condition of the variable display, and in the above-mentioned normal symbol display portion 59 (see FIG. 6A), the variable display of the normal symbol is started. Then, when the specified fluctuation time has passed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a predetermined winning symbol, the second starting winning opening 63 is opened in a manner corresponding to the type of the hit.

In addition, the details of the universal figure lottery value, the universal figure pattern lottery value, and the opening pattern of the second starting winning opening 63 related to the ordinary symbol will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, after the determination of the normal symbol, the winning/non-judgment is performed based on the determined ordinary symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning/non-judgment determination is first made from the acquired ordinary figure lottery value. The type of the universal symbol may be determined based on the result of the determination. Further, a winning/winning lottery value related to the ordinary symbol may be provided, and after the winning/winning lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed, the ordinary drawing lottery may be performed in accordance with the result of the winning/failing lottery.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the universal figure lottery value, which is a random number related to the ordinary symbol, and the universal figure pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers, but are not limited to this, and are related to the ordinary symbol. Each random number can be a hardware random number or a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<<Functions for holding special symbols>>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a universal figure hold means 135. Of these, the first holding means 133, if there is a new ball to the first start winning port 62, if the predetermined variation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by the ball Information (first special figure reservation storage information) relating to various random numbers (first win/loss lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol relating to the above-described entry is not permitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to four, and the hold related to the first special symbol can be held within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, and further, if there is a hold related to the first special symbol in the first holding means 133, the fluctuation start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied. , A new symbol variation related to the first special symbol will be permitted. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second game is executed prior to the first game, so the second special figure reservation storage information by the second reservation means 134 is set by the first reservation means 133. The first special map reservation storage information is preferentially digested. In this way, for the first special symbol, all the symbol variations corresponding to the second special symbol reservation storage information of the second special symbol have ended, and it is also the variation start condition that all of them have been consumed.

Regarding the above-mentioned second holding means 134 as well, when there is a new ball entering the second starting winning opening 63, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition relating to the second special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by entering the ball. Information relating to various random numbers (second win/win lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored.

The variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed when there was the above-mentioned entry is ended, and further, if there is a hold relating to the second special symbol in the second holding means 134, the second special symbol The fluctuation start condition related to is satisfied, and a new symbol fluctuation related to the second special symbol will be permitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold relating to the second special symbol is set to four similarly to the first special symbol, and within the range not exceeding the upper limit value, the hold relating to the second special symbol. Is possible.
<<Functions for holding normal symbols>>

Next, the above-mentioned universal figure holding means 135 will be described. If there is a ball entering the operation ports 68a and 68b (see FIG. 1), the universal figure holding means 135 does not satisfy the predetermined variation start condition related to the normal symbol, and the random number acquired by entering the ball (typically Information (general drawing hold storage information) related to the drawing lottery value and the like) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the above-described normal symbol relating to the ball entry is not permitted. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the normal symbol is set to four, and the hold related to the normal symbol can be held within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

When the variable display of the normal symbol that was being executed when there was the above-mentioned ball entry ends, and further, if there is no hold related to the normal symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned ball entry, it relates to the normal symbol. The fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and a new symbol fluctuation related to the normal symbol is permitted.
<<Main control display function>>

Next, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a general figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Of these, the first special symbol control means 136, if there is no hold related to the second special symbol, if the variation start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied, the first lottery means 111 determined by According to the variation pattern of the 1 special symbol, the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 6A), the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the blinking display in which the LED indicators M and N blink every 100 msec) I do. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol on the first special symbol display portion 70 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern elapses.

Further, the second special symbol control means 137, according to the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, if the variation start condition for the above-mentioned second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol display portion 71 ( In FIG. 6A), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the second special symbol display portion 71 when the variation time set by the variation pattern elapses.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display during the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, LED indicator lights M, N blink simultaneously in the first special symbol, LED indicator light W in the second special symbol. , X flashes at the same time. However, not limited to this, for example, eight LED indicator lights G to N (Q to X) are sequentially turned on in a predetermined pattern, or G to N (Q to X) are all blinked at the same time, and a variable display is performed. You may go.

Further, the universal figure control means 138 follows the variation pattern of the ordinary symbols determined by the ordinary figure lottery means 113 if the variation start condition relating to the above-mentioned ordinary symbols is satisfied, and the ordinary symbol display section 59 (see FIG. 6 ( In a))), the variable display of normal symbols is performed. Furthermore, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the normal symbol display portion 59 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern elapses.

Further, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holdings related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol. Then, the display of these reserved numbers, the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. 6 (a), the first special symbol storage display unit (LED indicator lamp O, P), the second special symbol storage display unit (LED display Lights Y and Z), and a normal symbol storage display unit (LED display lights C and D). Further, the other display control means 140 described above controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<<Special game functions>>

Subsequently, the special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied when the first special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode in the case of winning a big hit (or a small hit) in the first lottery, and The special game of opening the first special winning opening 91 in a predetermined manner according to the type of big hit as described above is executed. In addition, the special game control means 116 determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied when the second special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode in the case of winning a big hit (or a small hit) in the second lottery. , A special game for opening the above-described second special winning opening 92 in a predetermined mode according to the type of big hit as described above.
<<Functions related to specific games>>

Next, the specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control relating to the above-mentioned probability change and time reduction. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probability changing state, the time saving state, or the like according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, the probability variation state is attached to a predetermined type of jackpot, and is continued until the total number of times of variation display after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). During the probability variation state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a value higher than the normal time which is the non-probability variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is a total of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is a predetermined end condition number counted from the end point of the special game (for example, 100 times, 60 times, 40 times). , 20 times, etc.). Further, during the time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 are the time saving variation patterns so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than the normal state. Along with selecting, the control is performed to switch the fluctuation pattern table so that the fluctuation time is shortened even for the normal symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the easy entry game is executed as the specific game, and in the easy entry game, the opening/closing control of the second start winning opening 63 is executed. The opening/closing control of the second start winning opening 63 is controlled by the opening/closing control means 118 described later. Therefore, the specific game control means 117 causes the opening/closing control means 118 to perform predetermined opening/closing control of the second starting winning opening 63 during the specific game state. It should be noted that the probability variation during the specific game, a reduction in time, and a specific aspect of the easy-to-enter game will be described later.
<<Functions related to opening/closing control>>

Next, the opening/closing control means 118 will be described. The opening/closing control unit 118 controls the opening/closing operation of the normal electric winning combination of the second starting winning opening 63 and the special electric winning combination of the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the opening/closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric prize solenoid 76 to open the normal electric prize of the second start winning port 63. Further, the opening and closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the first big winning opening solenoid 80 and the second big winning opening solenoid 81 in the special game, and the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening. 92 is opened.

Further, the opening/closing control means 118 executes the opening/closing control of the second start winning opening 63 during the normal game. Further, the opening/closing control unit 118 executes the opening/closing control of the second starting winning opening 63 based on an opening pattern related to a specific game, which will be described later, in the probability variation state and the time saving state after the special game.
<<Functions related to advance information notification>>

Next, the above-mentioned advance information notifying means 119 will be described. The advance information notifying means 119 is acquired when the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 is hit, regardless of whether or not the symbol variable display corresponding to the winning is suspended. A process for transmitting information related to the various random number values to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information is performed.

As the advance notification information, for example, it is possible to distinguish whether the advance notification information is related to the first game or the second game, information indicating the acquired first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value, and the like. Can be illustrated. In addition, as the advance notification information other than these, each of the above-mentioned win/win lottery values (first win/win lottery value or second win/win lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value) , Each pattern lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) can be exemplified by information such as what kind of hit range, symbol range, and pattern range.

It should be noted that by transmitting such advance notification information, various prefetching effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. Further, as the prefetching effect, a pending notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details thereof will be described later.
<<Functions related to command transmission>>

Next, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting means 120 transmits a command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings, for example, at the time of winning a start, when the variation of the special symbol starts, when the variation of the special symbol stops, and when the big hit occurs. However, the transmission timing and transmission contents of such a command will be described later.
<Basic function of sub-board>

Next, the basic function of the above-described sub-board 104 will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and by the function of the above-described configuration (see FIG. 4), command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control. , Perform various functions such as performance execution. Therefore, like the main board 102, the sub-board 104 can be understood as having functional means (described later) for performing various functions.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-main board 301 has a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output and the like, and light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output and the like. Note that the term “lamp” in this embodiment has a meaning including an LED and the like.

The sub-main board 301 receives various commands from the main board 102 by the main command receiving unit 141. Further, the effect pattern determination means 142 determines the effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern (first special figure variation pattern or second special figure variation pattern) based on various commands from the main board 102. Here, in the relationship between the special figure variation pattern and the effect pattern, one special figure variation pattern is associated with a plurality of effect patterns, and one effect determination is performed based on the lottery or one variation. Only one effect pattern is associated with a pattern, and one effect is always the result of the effect lottery. Moreover, the effect pattern determination means 142 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the effect symbol 190.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination unit 142 includes information for specifying the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and the sound effect and light effect performed together with the display effect as necessary. The above-mentioned display effects include a display pattern of the effect design 190, a display pattern of the effect that fuels the expectation for the big hit during the variable display of the effect design 190 or suggests a high degree of expectation of the big hit. Be done.

When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination unit 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub substrate 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission unit 143. In addition, the command transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the sub sub board 302 also includes sound information determined by the sound control unit 144 described above.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub-board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs the necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 to form an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays a moving image for effect. Further, the production execution control means 147 operates the above-mentioned sound control circuit 537 (see FIG. 4) provided on the sub-sub-board 302 to execute control related to output adjustment of the various speakers 21. It should be noted that specific contents of various effects will be described later.

The functional means included in the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub-board 302 have been described above. It is also possible to do so. Similarly, with respect to each functional means included in the sub-main substrate 301, either one can be included in the main substrate 102 or the sub-sub-substrate 302. Furthermore, the functional means of the sub-sub-board 302 can be included in the sub-main board 301.
<Specific mode of various lottery on main board>
<<Successful lottery related to special symbols>>

Next, a specific mode of the winning/winning lottery (big hit lottery) relating to the special symbol, which is performed on the main board 102, will be described. FIG. 8A shows a win/loss determination table used in the present embodiment. In this win/loss determination table, a random number per special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “win/wrong random number”) and a first game Correspondence between the result of one lottery and the result of the second lottery related to the second game is defined. That is, the range of the winning/discarding random numbers is shown at the left end of FIG. 8A, and the lottery result related to the first lottery is shown at the center of the figure. Furthermore, the lottery result related to the first lottery is shown at the right end in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the range of the random numbers is "0 to 63238", "63239 to 63402", "63403 to 64878", "64879 to 65429", "65430 to 65534", and " 65535". Furthermore, the results of the first lottery and the second lottery include “outfall”, “normal time sure variation big jackpot”, “probability variation big jackpot”, and “small hit”.

Of these, “out” is a lottery result that is always out regardless of whether the probability state is normal or the above-described probability variation. Further, the “normal time probability variation big jackpot” is a lottery result that always wins regardless of whether the probability state is normal or the probability variation described above. Furthermore, the “probability change big hit” is a lottery result which is a “miss” at normal times but is a win only at the probability change. Further, "small win" is a lottery result in which the type of win is a small win.

That is, the win/loss random value range in this embodiment is “0 to 65535”, and the number of win/fail random numbers is 65536. Then, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number range of "0 to 63238" and the random number value of "65535" are assigned with the lottery result "off." Further, the random number range “63239 to 63402” is assigned with “normal time probability varying big jackpot”, and the random number range “63403 to 64878” is assigned with “probability varying big jackpot”.

Further, in the random number range “64879 to 65429”, “small hit” is assigned to the first lottery, and “defeat” is assigned to the second lottery. Further, "small hit" is assigned to the random number range "65430-65534" in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

When the random number value obtained as described above (hereinafter referred to as “win/win lottery value”) is in the range of “0 to 63238”, the result of the win/win lottery is irrespective of the probability state. It will be “out”. In addition, even if the win/loss lottery value in the second lottery is within the range of “64879 to 65429” and if the win/loss lottery value in the first lottery and the second lottery is “65535”, the probability state is also set. Regardless, the result of the lottery will be "outside". That is, when the winning/winning lottery value is the lower limit value “0” or the upper limit value “65535” of the winning/failing random value range, the lottery result is “out of bounds”.

In addition, in the normal time when the probability state is low, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, only when the winning/winning lottery value falls within the range of “63239 to 63402”, the winning is won. On the other hand, in the case of a probable change, the winning range is expanded, and not only when the winning/winning lottery value falls within the range of “63239 to 63402”, but also when the winning/winning lottery value falls within the range of “63403 to 64878”, it becomes a big hit.

In this way, a group of consecutive numerical values is formed for each lottery result in the numerical range of the random numbers. Then, for example, in the first lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, the numerical range “0 to 63238” is out of the group, “63239 to 63402” is the normal time probable variation big jackpot group, “63403 to 64878” is It is usually a big hit group. Further, the numerical value ranges “64879 to 65429” and “65430 to 65534” are all the small hit group, and “65535” is the outlier group.

Then, for example, in the first lottery, the number of random numbers corresponding to the deviation on the lower limit side is 63239. Further, the number of random numbers corresponding to the normal time probable variation big hit (big hit 1) is 164, and the number of random numbers corresponding to the normal time big hit (big hit 2) is 1476. Further, the number of random numbers corresponding to the small hit is 656 (=551+105), and the number of random numbers corresponding to the deviation on the upper limit side is one. The jackpot probability at the normal probability in the first game is 164/65536, and the jackpot probability at the high probability is 1640(=1476+1164)/65536.

In addition, as described above, the win/fail random number can take a value in the range of “0 to 65535”. In this embodiment, the win/fail random number is a hardware random number in the numerical range of “0 to 65535” and “0”. It is obtained by summing with a special random number (software random number) per special symbol in the numerical range of "-65520". The built-in random number is a value extracted from the built-in random number table. In the built-in random number table, numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 65535") are arranged in an arbitrary order, and the count value is incremented by 1 by the hardware (counter circuit) using the clock input to the CPU 501. Each time, the numerical values arbitrarily arranged in the built-in random number table are to be acquired according to the order in which they are arranged, regardless of the magnitude relationship of the numerical values. Then, the numerical values in the acquired built-in random number table are extracted and used in the calculation with the soft random number. It can be said that such a built-in random number is a random number generated by a random number generation device including a hardware configuration.

On the other hand, it can be said that the software random number is a random number generated by a random number generator having a software configuration in which a count value is incremented by 1 for each interrupt by a programmed counter and numerical values arranged in ascending or descending order are acquired. .. In this embodiment, the number of soft random numbers per special symbol is “65521”, which is a prime number, and the software random number added to the internal random number that is the addition source is more than the internal random number. The random number range (size of random number) is set small. Here, in the generation of the acceptance/rejection random number, the built-in random number and the software random number are not simply added, but for example, they are added, or they are added, subtracted, multiplied or divided by a predetermined number, and then added to each other. , Other calculation may be performed.

In this embodiment, the pass/fail random number is created by a combination of the hardware random number and the software random number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create the pass/fail random number by only one of them.
<<Symbol lottery related to special symbols>>

Next, a specific mode of the symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to the special symbol performed on the main board 102 will be described. FIGS. 9A to 9D show various symbol determination tables, and in the present embodiment, each symbol determination table is used when a big hit, a small hit, or a loss occurs in the winning/absence lottery described above. It is being used.

Of these, FIG. 9(a) is a jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery (first jackpot symbol determination table), and FIG. 9(b) is a jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery (second jackpot symbol). (Determination table). Further, FIG. 9(c) is a symbol determination table for small hits (small hit symbol determination table) that is referred to when the result of the hit determination in the first lottery or the second lottery is a small hit. Further, FIG. 9(d) is a symbol determination table for outfall (offset symbol determination table) which is referred to when the result of the hit determination in the first lottery or the second lottery is out. In the present embodiment, by using the first special symbol display portion 70 and the second special symbol display portion 71 shown in FIG. 6(a), many kinds of special symbols (for example, about 50 patterns each) Although the display is performed, here, in order not to complicate the description and the illustration, the description will be made assuming that there are only 10 types of special symbols “0” to “9”.

As shown at the left end in FIG. 9A, in the first lottery jackpot symbol determination table, the symbol random number value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999”, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. ing. Further, the symbol random value range is "0 to 39", "40 to 99", "100 to 109", "110 to 119", "120 to 499", "500 to 619", "620 to 699", It is divided into each group of "700-799", "800-809", "810-859", "860-961", "962-999", and each symbol random value range is shown in the figure. As shown, "7", "7", "7", "5", "5", "3", "3", "1", "0", "0", "2", "2" Special symbols are assigned. Further, each special symbol is assigned a jackpot type, and in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 16R probability variation is assigned to the special symbols “7” and “5”, and the special symbols “3” and “5”. The above-mentioned 4R probability variation is assigned to "1", and the above-mentioned 4R normal is assigned to special symbols "0" and "2".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the second lottery, the symbol random value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” as in the first lottery, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. ing. Further, the symbol random value range is “0 to 109”, “110 to 119”, “120 to 499”, “500 to 619”, “620 to 759”, “760 to 799”, “800 to 859”, It is divided into each group of "860-911" and "912-999", and in each symbol random value range, as shown in the figure, "7", "7", "7", "5". , "3", "1", "0", "2", "2" special symbols are assigned. In the present embodiment, the special symbols "7" and "5" are assigned the above-mentioned 16R probability variation, the special symbols "3" and "1" are assigned the above-mentioned 4R probability variation, and the special symbol "0", The aforementioned 4R normal is assigned to "2".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the win/loss lottery is a big hit, the special symbol (non-16R big hit symbol) that is a big hit other than the 16R big hit is included in the upper limit value "999" in the numerical range of the symbol random number described above. It is assigned. Not limited to this, the lottery result of the non-16R jackpot symbol may be assigned to the lower limit value “0”, and the lottery result of the non-16R jackpot symbol may be assigned to both the upper limit value and the lower limit value.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), in the first lottery and the second lottery, the symbol random value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” as in the jackpot symbol determination, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. Has become. Further, the symbol random number value range is divided into each group of “0 to 332” and “333 to 999”, and each symbol random number value range has “4” and “6” as shown in the figure. Special symbols are assigned.

As shown in FIG. 9D, in the first lottery and the second lottery, the symbol random value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” as in the big hit symbol determination and the small hit symbol determination, and the symbol random number. Is 1000. Further, in the first lottery, the symbol random value range is divided into each group of “0 to 961” which is the first outlier range and “962 to 999” which is the second outlier range, and each symbol disorder As shown in the figure, special symbols “8” and “9” are assigned to the numerical range. Further, in the present embodiment, the first symbol is assigned to the special symbol "8", and the second symbol is assigned to the special symbol "9".

Of these, the first deviation is the standard deviation and can also be referred to as the "standard deviation". On the other hand, the second outlier is used so that an effect tendency different from that of the first outlier occurs, and can also be referred to as “non-standard out” or “specific out”. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the second outlier is used for pre-reading notice effect related to a predetermined reach, and in this sense, it can be referred to as “reach out”.

On the other hand, the symbol random value range in the second lottery is “0 to 999” as in the first lottery, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. However, in the second lottery, the special symbol “8” is assigned to all of “0 to 999”. Then, in the present embodiment, the special symbol "8" is assigned the above-mentioned first offset.

In the present embodiment, the symbol lottery relating to the special symbol is performed by software random numbers, and the random number generation process is simplified as compared with the win/loss lottery using both software random numbers and hardware random numbers. This is because the prize lottery is likely to be the target of fraud, whereas the symbol lottery is less likely to be the target of fraud compared to the win/loss lot, so for the design lottery, the crystal oscillator necessary to generate a hardware random number This is because the configuration does not need to use parts such as. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create a symbol random number using only a hardware random number, or a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<<Variable pattern lottery related to special symbols>>

Next, a specific mode of the lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) relating to the variation pattern performed on the main board 102 will be described. 10(a) to 10(d) show a variation pattern table, and of these, in FIG. 10(a), the above-mentioned hit/miss result is "disappearance", and the kind of disengagement pattern is described above. It shows a variation pattern table for the first deviation used in the case of the first deviation symbol (first deviation symbol). Further, FIG. 10B is the second used when the hit/miss result is “off” and the off symbol type is the above-mentioned second off symbol (second off symbol). The fluctuation pattern table for the deviation is shown. Further, FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern table for the 16R jackpot used when the above-mentioned hit/miss result is “16R jackpot”, and FIG. The fluctuation pattern table for non-16R big hit used when it is "4R big hit" and "small hit" is shown.

In each of the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the fluctuation pattern random number value range related to the fluctuation pattern lottery is “0 to 49999”, and the number of symbol random numbers is 50,000. Further, in the variation pattern table for “first deviation” (variation pattern table for first deviation symbol) shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern random value ranges are “0 to 2599” and “2600 to 4999”. , "5000-49999", and the variation patterns of "0-2599" and "2600-4999" are assigned the variation patterns of "super 1" and "super 2", respectively. Has been. Further, a variation pattern such as “normal 1”, “normal 2”, or “no reach” is assigned to the variation pattern random value range of “5000 to 49999”.

Here, in the present embodiment, each variation pattern is, to a large extent, other than "no reach" and "no reach" accompanied by the above-described reach display effect (hereinafter referred to as "reach effect"). Reachable”. Of these, "no reach" is used to specify an effect pattern that does not reach, out of various effect patterns described later. Further, the variation patterns “without reach” and other “with reach” include a large number of subdivided variation patterns (for example, about several tens), but the explanation and illustrations are complicated here. The fluctuation patterns are comprehensively grouped so that they do not occur.

That is, the above-mentioned "reach" is always displayed as a combination mode of the effect design 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), except when a special effect pattern is included, in the case of a big hit. It is something. Further, even if the jackpot is not a big hit, it may be out of reach (out of reach) through the display mode of "reach". Therefore, in the case of "reach", the player can expect the production of a big hit to be developed thereafter. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of "no reach" is selected, it does not become "reach" except when a special effect pattern is included, and expects the player to hit the jackpot with "reach". It does not stir up.

In addition, the fluctuation time associated with various fluctuation patterns of “without reach” is relatively shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern of “with reach”. However, such a variation time relationship represents a tendency to the last, and some variation patterns included in "without reach" are more variable than some variation patterns included in "with reach". It is also possible to set a relationship such as long.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(d), the variation patterns of "with reach" described above include so-called normal reach variation patterns of "normal 1", "normal 2", and "normal 3". The variation patterns can be divided into “super 1”, “super 2”, and “super 3” variation patterns, which are so-called super reach (also called special reach). Of these, each of the variation patterns of “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “normal 3” has a degree of agitation (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “agitation”) related to the expectation of a big hit for the player. , Reach is relatively low compared to Super Reach. In addition, the above-mentioned variation patterns of “super 1”, “super 2”, and “super 3” specify a reachable effect in which the degree of agitation for the player is relatively higher than in normal reach. ..

It should be noted that the "normal 1" to "normal 3" and the "super 1" to "super 3" variation patterns also include a large number of subdivided variation patterns (for example, about 50). Here, the variation patterns are comprehensively grouped so that the description and illustration are not complicated. Also, the variation patterns of "with reach", "normal 1" to "normal 3" and "super 1" to "super 3", should be further divided into those for out-of-range and those for big hits. However, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, common names are used here.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the variation pattern table for “first out”, each of “super 1”, “super 2”, “normal 1”, “normal 2”, or “no reach” is displayed. A fluctuation pattern is assigned. For this reason, when the flag “00H” of “out” is stored in the RWM as a result of the winning/disapproving lottery, one of these fluctuation patterns is selected according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value. It In the variation pattern lottery, different variation patterns are selected in accordance with the game situation such as the number of holdings at that time and the game state (whether or not the game is being shortened or not). If the win/no win lottery result is “out”, first, the variation pattern table for the first out-side shown in FIG. 10A is set. Immediately after that, the variation pattern based on the information that the symbol (second offset symbol) related to the above-mentioned second offset (see FIG. 9D) is determined, that is, the symbol number “9” is stored. The table is changed to that shown in FIG. 10B, and control is performed so that only the reach variation pattern is selected.

Then, in the variation pattern table for "second deviation" (variation pattern table for second deviation) shown in FIG. 10B, the variation pattern random value range is "0 to 23999", "24000 to 49999". , And the variation pattern of “super 3” is assigned to the variation pattern random value range of “0 to 23999”. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern of “normal 3” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern random value range of “24000 to 49999”. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the number of characters and the variation pattern in the variation pattern table for “second deviation” is the variation pattern table for “4R big hit” and “small hit” described later in this embodiment (FIG. 10D). (See) and is the same.

Subsequently, for the 16R jackpot shown in FIG. 10C, “super 1” is associated with the group having the pattern lottery value “0 to 23519”, and “super 1” is associated with the group having the pattern lottery value “23520 to 47039”. 2” is associated. Furthermore, "normal 1" is associated with the group having the pattern lottery value "47040-48999", and reach of "normal 2" is associated with the group having the pattern lottery value "49000-49999". As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of “with reach” is selected for all cases where the hit/no hit determination result is the 16R big hit.

Further, for the “4R big hit” and “small hit” shown in FIG. 10D, “supermarket 3” is associated with the group having the pattern lottery value “0 to 23999”, and the pattern lottery value “24000 to 49999”. “Normal 3” is associated with the group.

Subsequently, selection of a variation pattern according to a game situation (particularly the number of holdings) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, here, in the case where the result of the win/loss lottery is “first out” (see FIG. 10A), the variation pattern lottery according to the game situation will be described. In addition, the number of holdings is exemplified here as an index indicating the game situation.

FIG. 8B shows the variation pattern table for “off” in more detail as compared with FIG. 10A. In FIG. 8B, the fluctuation pattern lottery value is shown on the front side at the left end, and the number of holdings is shown at the top of the table at the top. The number of holdings includes the number of holdings 0 to the number of holdings 4, and below each holding number column, each of the fluctuation pattern lottery values “0 to 2599”, “2600 to 4999”, and “5000 to 49999”. The fluctuation pattern assigned to each group is described. Here, in FIG. 8B, the numbers 0 to 4 held are described as “hold 0” to “hold 4”, respectively.

In the present embodiment, in all of the numbers 0 to 4 held, the variation pattern “super 1” is assigned to the variation pattern lottery values “0 to 2599” and the variation pattern lottery value “2600 to 4999” is set to “super 2”. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern of “” is assigned. Further, the variation pattern lottery value “5000 to 49999” is assigned with the variation patterns of “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “no reach”. It is different for each.

In FIG. 8( b ), the relative relationship between the heights of the “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “no reach” entry columns is within the variation pattern lottery value “5000-49999”. Represents the difference in allocation ratio. That is, with respect to the number of reservations 0 and the number of reservations 1 (described as “reservation 0, 1” in the figure), the height of each entry column of “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “no reach” is high. Are almost the same, and the allocation ratios of these fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern lottery value “5000 to 49999” are also substantially equal (about 1/3).

On the other hand, with respect to the number of reservations 2, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 1” is smaller than that of the cases of the number of reservations 0 and 1, and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 2” is , "Normal 1" and the same level. Then, the allocation ratio of the variation pattern of “no reach” is larger than that of the number of reservations 0 and the number of reservations 1. As a result, in the case of the number of reservations 2 is 0 and the number of reservations 1 is held. In comparison, “no reach” is easily selected, and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are difficult to be selected.

As for the number of reservations 3, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of "normal 1" is further smaller than that of the case of the reservation number 2 and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of "normal 2" is "normal 1". It is about the same. Then, the allocation ratio of the variation pattern of "no reach" is higher than that of the case where the number of reservations is 2, and as a result, the case of the number of reservations of 3 is "no reach" as compared with the case of the number of reservations of 2. Is easy to be selected, and it is difficult to select “normal 1” and “reach 2”.

Further, with respect to the number of reservations 4, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of "normal 1" is smaller than that of the case of the number of reservations 3 and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of "normal 2" is "normal 1". It is about the same. The allocation ratio of the variation pattern of "no reach" is higher than that of the case where the number of reservations is 3, and as a result, the case of the number of reservations of 4 is "no reach" as compared with the case of the number of reservations of 3. Is easy to be selected, and it is difficult to select “normal 1” and “reach 2”.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as the number of reservations increases, "no reach" is more likely to be selected, and "normal 1" and "reach 2" are less likely to be selected. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time associated with the variation pattern of “without reach” is relatively shorter than that of the variation pattern of “with reach”, and thus the variation as the number of holding increases. There is also a tendency that time is short.

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern lottery value is assigned to the number of reservations 0 and the number of reservations 1, but the number of reservations is not limited to this, and in the case of the number of reservations 1 compared to the number of reservations 0, “no reach” It is also possible to make an assignment such that “is easily selected” and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are difficult to be selected.

Further, in FIG. 8B, the number of holdings is given as an attribute related to the game situation, but the number of holdings is not limited to only the number of holdings. Whether or not, whether it is the first game or the second game, whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit, what kind of big hit was won, and the number of specific fluctuations after the big hit It can be performed based on various attributes such as whether it is a period. For example, in the case of time saving, if there is no big hit, “no reach” is selected with a probability of 90% or more, and in the case of a big hit, there is a fluctuation pattern of “with reach” with a probability of 98% or more, “normal 1” and It is possible to set the variation pattern table so that the tendency such that any one of “reach 2” is selected occurs. Similarly, the variation pattern table for the second deviation (FIG. 10B) can be similarly subdivided for control, and the second deviation and other conditions (for example, a limited frequency pattern effect described later) ) May be prioritized to determine the table.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery related to the special symbol is performed by the software random number like the above-mentioned symbol lottery, and the random number is compared to the winning/loss lottery using both software random number and hardware random number. The generation process is simplified. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create a random number related to a variation pattern lottery of a special symbol only with a hardware random number, or a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<<Various lottery related to ordinary symbols>>

Next, a concrete mode is explained about various lottery related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol. First, in the lottery related to the ordinary symbols, there are the universal symbol lottery and the universal symbol variation pattern random lottery. In these various types of lottery, the universal symbol random numbers and universal symbol variation pattern random numbers which are the corresponding random numbers are used. And, although illustration is omitted, each random number range is 0 to 262 for universal symbol random numbers, and 0 to 232 for universal symbol variation pattern random numbers. In addition, as described above, when performing the winning/discarding lottery related to the ordinary symbols, a universal figure winning/discarding random number is provided, and the range of this universal symbol winning/discarding random number can be set to a predetermined numerical range such as 0 to 282. is there.

The ordinary symbols determined by the above-mentioned general symbol lottery include those linked to the above-mentioned short opening and long opening. Then, if the value of the acquired random number of the universal symbol corresponds to the short opening, after the normal symbol corresponding to the short opening is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is relatively short. Is opened. Furthermore, when a random number value corresponding to the hit is obtained in the universal symbol validity judgment, if the acquired random value of the universal symbol corresponds to long opening, the normal symbol corresponding to long opening is stopped and displayed. After that, the above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is opened for a relatively long time.

That is, the long opening is executed during the specific game as described above, but may be executed during times other than the specific game. Short opening and long opening performed at times other than such specific games are referred to as "short opening during normal playing", "short opening during normal playing", "long opening during normal playing", "long opening during normal playing", etc., respectively. Can be called. In addition, as the hitting symbol related to the ordinary symbol, not only the symbol associated with the short opening and the long symbol, but the symbol corresponding to another opening mode may be provided. As this "other opening mode", for example, a middle opening set to an opening time belonging to a short opening and a long opening can be exemplified.

Further, for the universal figure variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned universal figure variation pattern random number, the variation time defines the variation time of the ordinary symbol. And, as for the variation time of the normal symbol, different tendencies are caused depending on factors such as winning or hitting, the symbol, and the gaming state (including the number of holdings).

For example, for the game state (non-specific game state) that is not the specific game described above, five universal figure variation patterns are provided in this embodiment. More specifically, the fluctuation times defined by the five universal figure fluctuation patterns during the non-specific game are five kinds of 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds and 10 seconds. On the other hand, there is only one universal figure fluctuation pattern during the specific game in this embodiment, and the fluctuation time is shorter than during the non-specific game (for example, about 2 seconds).

In addition, the variation pattern of the normal symbol that can be selected during the specific game may be, for example, a plurality of types having different variation times, or may be controlled to have a plurality of types of opening patterns of the ordinary electric auditors. By doing this, the opening timing of the second starting winning opening 63 that is performed after the end of the variation time at the time of winning becomes difficult for the player to understand, and so-called hitting, which fires the game ball at a timing, is prevented. It becomes possible to do.
<Specific mode relating to specific game>

Next, a specific mode of the specific game described above will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the specific game is provided with a probability variation, a time saving, and a game for facilitating entry of a ball. Then, in the present embodiment, at least one of these various games is executed in a mode according to the result of the jackpot lottery. It should be noted that the function that causes these probability changes and the like can also be referred to as a “privilege function”.
<<Probability fluctuation game>>

Probability fluctuation game (probability variation described above), if the result of the big hit lottery is a predetermined one, change the probability state of the subsequent game so that the big hit occurrence probability is higher than the normal probability state It is a thing. The specific mode of the big hit lottery in this probability change will be described later. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the continuation period of the probability variation state (probability variation period) is determined based on the number of times the special symbol varies.

The number of times of change of the special symbol is determined as once from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display. Then, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the predetermined jackpot in the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). Such a function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as, for example, the ST function.
<<Variable time reduction game>>

Variation time shortening game (time saving mentioned above), the variation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 described above, in comparison with the case of the normal game, it is generally shortened. is there. Here, "generally shortening" does not mean shortening the normal game in all cases, and in some cases, when the variation time of the special symbol is equivalent to the normal game, or by the reach pattern etc. It means that it may include a case where it is longer than a part of the variation pattern of. Then, according to this time saving, since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, even if the winnings to the starting winning a prize openings (the first starting winning a prize opening 62 and the second starting award winning entrance 63) occur continuously, The variable display and the stop display of the symbols can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for the big hit lottery per unit time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the duration of the time-shortened state (time-shortened period) is determined based on the number of times the special symbol fluctuates, as in the probability variation state. Then, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

In the present embodiment, the probability variation period and the time saving period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the time saving period may be different periods. For example, it is possible to set the probability variation period to 104 times and the time saving period to 100 times. Further, the probability variation period and the shortening period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of 4, 25, 100 times or the like depending on the type of big hit that has occurred. In addition, it is possible to set the time saving period to any of 20, 40, 60, 100, etc., depending on the type of big hit that has occurred. Further, it is possible to provide a specific game state in which only the above-mentioned easy-to-enter state (easy-to-win state) is performed without time saving.

Further, it is possible to provide a so-called falling lottery function. Examples of the falling lottery include the following. For example, after a certain number of changes (for example, 50 times) that are less than the maximum number of changes (here, 100 times), the probability change or the shortening time, each time the special symbol changes until the maximum number of changes is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed to determine whether to end the probability change or the time saving. When the specific game end lottery is won, the certainty change and the time saving are ended, and the game state from the next change returns to the normal state without the certainty change and the time saving.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute only one of the certain games in the specific game without being limited to executing both the probability variation and the time saving. For example, depending on the type of jackpot that is won, it is possible to provide only the shortening and not the probability variation, or to not provide the shortening and only the probability variation.
<<Easy entry game>>

Next, the above-mentioned game for facilitating entry into a ball will be described. This easy-to-enter game is a game state in which the opening mode of the second starting winning opening 63 makes it easier to accept the game ball than usual. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening 63 is provided with the opening/closing blade, and when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner, the opening operation is performed for the predetermined time. And, when the game easy to enter the game is executed, the control mode such as time saving related to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol, the opening extension related to the normal electric accessory, and the combination of these control modes, The easiness of entering the second start winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy-to-enter state (also referred to as an easy-to-win state) is formed.

Of the above-mentioned various control modes in the ordinary symbol, the time saving related to the ordinary symbol is a control mode in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation related to the ordinary symbol is the winning probability of the ordinary symbol. Is a control mode for improving the normal state (probability change related to the normal symbol). Further, the extension of the normal electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second starting winning opening 63 is made longer than the short opening in the normal time (during non-specific game) to perform the long opening.

As described above, the easy-to-enter game during the specific game in the present embodiment uses the three functions of the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability variation of the open lottery, and the extension of the normal electric auditors, and the second start winning opening. Increase the ease of entering the 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to increase the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, at least one of the three functions may be switched between a period in which it is implemented and a period in which it is not implemented according to the gaming state.

The duration of such an easy-to-enter game can be determined based on the short-term period related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the entry facilitation game is continued during the time saving relating to the special symbol, and the entry facilitation game is terminated when the time saving relating to the special symbol ends. Then, in this case, the variation pattern of the normal symbol (general symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the special symbol time saving is finished is provided for the normal time (at the time of non-specific game) It is possible to make a decision based on the fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors in the easy-to-enter state during such a specific game (the opening mode during the specific game) is referred to as "specific game long open" or "time saving long open". It is possible. Then, as a specific mode of the long opening during the specific game, a continuous open mode in which the opening period from the start to the end of the opening is constituted by one opening of, for example, about 5 seconds can be exemplified.

Further, as another mode, there is an intermittent mode in which the opening period from the start to the end of opening is constituted by opening a plurality of times. In this intermittent opening mode, for example, an interval time for temporarily closing is interposed between the opening times of 2.32 seconds, 1.60 seconds, and 1.60 seconds, for example, a total of 5. It is possible to exemplify the one in which an open time of 52 (=2.32+1.60+1.60) seconds is secured. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, an opening pattern by a combination of respective opening times of 2.96 seconds, 1.14 seconds, 1.56 seconds, 1.14 seconds, 1.60 seconds, 1.60. There is also provided an opening pattern by a combination of each opening time of seconds and 1.14 seconds.

It is also possible to select by a lottery which of the continuous open mode and the intermittent open mode described above is to be executed, or to select which of the various intermittent open modes to be executed. Further, in the intermittent open mode, a part or all of each open time may be configured by an extremely short open time such as 0.5 seconds.

More specifically, for example, opening for 0.5 seconds can be repeated 3 times with an intervening interval time, and a total opening time of 1.5 seconds can be secured. And, such an extremely short time opening that prevents the ball from entering the second starting winning opening 63 can be referred to as a "short opening for a specific game" or a "short opening for a short time". In addition, an intermittent open mode by a combination of short open at the time of specific game, such as an open mode that secures a total of 1.5 seconds, may be referred to as, for example, "intermittent open mode by a combination of short open". It is possible.
<Main production in Pachinko machines>
<<Basic display mode of production design>>

Next, the main ones of various effects executed by the sub-main substrate 301 and the sub-sub substrate 302 based on commands from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 will be described. Then, here, first, a basic display mode of the above-described effect design 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) will be described.

The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 with the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7(b)) along with the first special symbol or the second special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53. .. That is, the effect symbol 190 is variably displayed according to the variation time defined by the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is produced at the end. A series of operations such as ending the variable display of the design 190 is a basic display mode.

The stop symbol displayed along with the stop of the effect symbol 190 is composed of a combination of three symbols, a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. And when the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big hit, a combination of squares having three symbols such as "777" and "555" is a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. If the result of the big hit lottery is out of alignment, for example, in a combination such as "767", "928", "331" or the like, a combination of one or all of the effect symbols is different from the other effect symbols. The design 190 is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG.7(b), the situation where the combination of the effect design 190 was the combination of "331" which is the outside is illustrated.

Here, "stop symbol" and "stop symbol" in this embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 in a state where the combinations such as "767" and "928" are maintained, only that is "determined stop". It does not correspond to what you have done. Then, the state in which the effect design 190 does not reach the “fixed stop” while maintaining the combination in this way can be referred to as a “temporary stop” state.

As a display mode of such a "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect design 190 is oscillating (shaking) in small steps can be exemplified. The mode of temporary stop in which the effect design 190 is swaying in small steps while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a “sway variation” mode. Examples of the manner of shaking of the effect design 190 in this “temporary stop” include vertical or horizontal linear movement and horizontal rotational movement, and the movement range can be several millimeters.

In addition, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “fixed stop”, a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination after the state of temporary stop can be exemplified. Furthermore, at the time of this “fixed stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been made. Then, as an effect indicating that the fixed display is performed, the fixed stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the display area 194 in which the fixedly stopped effect design 190 image is displayed is temporarily blacked ( It is possible to exemplify that the effect design 190 that has been fixedly stopped again appears after a so-called blackout). It is also conceivable that the above blackout effect is performed only in a predetermined case (for example, when the super reach 3 is executed).

In addition, in the display mode of "reach" described above, the effect symbol that maintains the combination of reach may be displayed in the mode of "temporary stop" described above. Then, after the reach display by the "temporary stop", the symbols that have been variably displayed (here, the medium effect design 190b) constitute a combination of the deviation (a combination of the deviation reach), "temporarily stop", and the combination is set. It is possible to exemplify an effect in which “fixed stop” is performed while keeping the variable display and the variable display is ended. Further, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" due to the combination of the outlying reach, the middle effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect has a high reliability (reliability related to a big hit. It can also be exemplified as a production that develops to a relatively high degree).

It should be noted that the scroll display mode of the effect design 190 is not limited to the vertical scroll described above, and various display modes can be adopted. Then, as another display mode, for example, a mode in which the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis to perform variable display can be exemplified. Further, for example, the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are sequentially fed out in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back of the screen to the front, along the linear or curved orbit while being enlarged. Display modes such as, can also be exemplified. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a mode of scroll display in which the effect symbol that goes from the rear to the front comes down from the upper side to the lower side.

Although illustration is omitted, the arrangement of the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c may be changed in the vertical direction, and the effect design 190 may be configured by an upper effect design, a middle effect design, and a lower effect design. .. Then, in this case, a display mode in which the elemental symbols of these effect symbols are moved (horizontal scrolling) in the horizontal direction (for example, from left to right) can also be exemplified.

Further, a plurality of various scroll display modes as described above may be provided in one type of pachinko gaming machine 10, and various scroll display modes may be selectively used depending on the effect pattern and effect mode.

Further, in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the vertical middle part of the display area 194 is illustrated, and the effective line is the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set the number of effective lines to 5, for example. Then, in the variable display mode in which vertical scrolling is performed as in the present embodiment, when the display mode of 5 lines is adopted, the 5 lines are the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line. Composed of lines.

Further, in the variable display mode (horizontal scrolling) in which horizontal scrolling is performed as described above, when the display mode of 5 lines is adopted, 5 lines are the left line, the middle line, the right line, and the diagonal line rising to the right. , It is possible to construct by a diagonal line rising to the left.

Further, in FIG. 7(b), the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are shown in a simplified manner only by numbers in a predetermined font, but the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are numbers and the like. It may be configured by a combination of a part that means a predetermined symbol (the element design that is the above-mentioned symbol element production design) and a part that consists of a pattern other than the predetermined symbol (the element design that is a non-symbol element production design). It is possible. And as the portion consisting of a pattern other than a predetermined symbol, various design images and portraits, and combinations thereof can be exemplified, and further, various design images and portraits combined with symbols can be animated. It is also possible to

Further, from the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c, a plurality of sets of element designs are provided, and it is possible to use them properly according to the situation. In this case, for example, each of the left effect design 190a, the middle effect design 190b, and the right effect design 190c is provided with a plurality of sets of element symbols that represent the meanings of the numbers "1" to "9", depending on the difference in the effect mode and the like. , During the execution of a certain specific production mode, the corresponding element patterns of "1" to "9" are used, and during execution of another specific production mode, the corresponding "1" to "9" It is possible to use the element pattern of "9".

The difference in the above-mentioned effect modes can be distinguished by, for example, the difference in the scene or situation in the effect displayed on the effect display device 60. Further, the difference in the scene or situation in the performance should be distinguished by the difference in the performance content such as the background, the scene, the characters, the actions of the characters, the cut-in mode, etc. displayed on the performance display device 60. Is possible.

Further, the display mode of the effect design 190 is not limited to the various display modes described above, and various display modes can be adopted. For example, during a predetermined period from the start of variation of the effect design 190 to the stop display, the transparency of the image of the effect design 190 can be made higher than before and not visible.

In addition, when making the production design 190 invisible in this way, although illustration is omitted, the production design 190 is made transparent to the extent that it is not visible, and instead of the production design 190, the first special design or the second special design. It is also possible to display a design (alternative design) showing the state of the design. And as this substitute design, it is possible to exemplify one in which only symbols such as numbers are displayed in a variable size and stopped at the corner of the display area 194 in a size smaller than the symbol element production design of the production design 190. Furthermore, depending on the situation, both the substitute design and the effect design 190 may be displayed at the same time.
<<Example of production pattern>>

Next, the above-mentioned effect pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state of being associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the production pattern including the production design 190 is defined in the production pattern. More specifically, in the production pattern, a variation process from a variation start to a variation stop for the selected production design 190 and a production process such as a background displayed in combination with the production design 190 and story development are defined. There is. Then, there are some production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Among these, when the production pattern of “with reach” is executed, the reach production which is a big hit if one more production symbol (here, the intermediate production symbol 190b) is prepared is performed on the production display device 60. Then, when the result of the win/no win lottery related to the special symbol is the big hit, the display of the squares such as “777” and “333” depending on the type of the big hit is performed by the effect design 190 which is definitely stopped. In addition, when the result of the win/no win lottery related to the special symbol is out of alignment, for example, a combination such as “767” or “515” indicating the outfall is performed by the fixed and stopped effect design 190.

Furthermore, when the production pattern of "no reach" is executed, a combination without reach such that the left production design 190a and the right production design 190c are not reach combinations, such as "928" and "331", It is performed by the effect design 190 which is definitely stopped.

Some of these effect patterns have various long and short fluctuation times, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of “with reach” also includes a fluctuation time of several minutes. In addition, in the present embodiment, the production without reach corresponding to "no reach", "normal reach", and "super reach" in the variation pattern (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) related to the special symbol described above. A pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, and a super reach effect pattern are provided. As described above, the effect using the effect design 190 may be referred to as a sub-variation pattern. Then, for these effect patterns, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern determined by the main board 102, and the number of effect patterns is wider than the variation patterns described above. ing. Note that these effect patterns include, as effects that are displayed on the effect display device 60 separately from the sub-variation pattern, hold effect display, various notice effects, and the like, which will be described later. Sometimes used.

In addition, these reach are divided into “strong reach” with relatively high jackpot reliability and “weak reach” with relatively low jackpot reliability. For example, the above “normal reach” is weak reach A "reach" can be a "strong reach". In addition, “strong reach” and “weak reach” may be provided in “super reach”.
<<Hold effect display related to special design>>

Next, the hold display (holding effect display) relating to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. In the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a first reservation number display section 196 showing the reservation number of the winning/discarding lottery value in the first game, and The second hold number display portion 197 showing the hold number of the winning/winning lottery value in the two games is displayed. It should be noted that, here, in order to simplify the description and the illustration, each pending display is represented by a perfect circle, but the pending display may be performed, for example, by displaying a crystal, a jewel, or another predetermined item. .. Further, the hold display may be performed by displaying, for example, a person or an animal.

In the present embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is displayed on the above-mentioned first hold number display unit 196. Various forms of the hold display can be adopted as described above, but here, it is assumed that a blue item is displayed as the basic hold display. Further, when the number of holdings increases, a holding display is added. Then, when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit, four holdings are displayed on the first holding number display portion 196, as shown in FIG. 7A.

Further, the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the right end portion of the first hold number display unit 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. Has become. Then, the second display position, the third display position, and the fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, in the following, the hold displays performed from the first display position to the fourth display position are referred to as "hold 1", "hold 2", "hold 3", and "hold 4", respectively.

For example, in the effect display device 60, the hold occurs while the effect design 190 relating to the first game is being performed, and in the situation where one hold display is not being performed on the first hold number display unit 196, either. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the above-mentioned "hold 1" position). Further, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been made yet, and "Hold 2" to "Hold 4" have not occurred. When the "hold 1" is generated in this manner and the hold is further generated, the display relating to the generated hold is performed at the position of "hold 2" on the left side of the "hold 1". Then, when "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" are displayed, and "Hold 3" and "Hold 4" are not displayed, when a further hold occurs, "Hold 3" is displayed according to the number of held holds. Or “Protect 4” is displayed.

Then, if the variable display that was being executed when "Hold 1" occurred was ended, and if other fluctuation start conditions related to the first game were also satisfied, the above-mentioned pending storage information relating to "Hold 1" At the stage of being consumed, the hold display of “Hold 1” moves to the right of the first hold number display portion 196. The variation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side of the first reserved number display unit 196. The variation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (variation information) relating to the variation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of “Hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

Here, the size, color, and form related to the item when moving the hold display of "Maintenance 1" to the change information display unit 195, while the change display of the effect design 190 being executed is changing, or when stopped, etc. You may make it change the display elements, such as. In the example of FIGS. 7A and 7B, the size is enlarged when the hold display of “Hold 1” is changed to the variable information display 198.

As described above, when the hold display in “Hold 1” moves to the variable information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and “Hold 2” is shifted to the position of “Hold 1”. Further, if "Hold 3" and "Hold 4" exist, "Hold 3" shifts to the "Hold 2" position, and "Hold 4" shifts to the "Hold 3" position. Then, in such a situation, if a further hold occurs, a new "hold 4" occurs, and the hold number reaches the upper limit. If no new hold occurs, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is advanced.

It should be noted that it is possible, in a broad sense, to consider the holding effect in a broad sense, including the changed state from the hold display in "Maintenance 1" to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195, but is not limited to this. It is also possible to treat such that the hold display up to "hold 1" is set as the hold display, and the changed state of the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Further, when the variation display related to the effect design 190 is not performed, and the number of holdings is 0, and there is a ball in the first starting winning opening 62, the display of "Hold 1" is not performed and the variation information. The variation information display 198 is directly displayed on the display unit 195. Only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the variation information display 198 in the variation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Next, the above-mentioned second number-of-holds display unit 197 will be described, but the description of the same points as the first number-of-holds display unit 196 will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second holding number display section 197 is located on the opposite side of the first holding number display section 196 (on the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned variation information display section 195 interposed therebetween. ) Is located.

Further, when a hold related to the second game occurs, a predetermined hold display is displayed on the second hold number display portion 197. As the mode of the hold display, various things can be adopted like the first hold number display unit 196, but here, as the basic hold display, unlike the first hold number display unit 196, an orange item is displayed. Shall be displayed. Further, when the number of holdings increases, a holding display is added, and when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 7A, the second holding number display portion 197 displays four holdings.

In addition, the second hold number display portion 197 also includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the portion of the second hold number display portion 197 at the left end when viewed from the player is the first display position. Has become. Then, the second display position, the third display position, and the fourth display position are provided in order toward the right end. Furthermore, regarding the second game as well, it is possible to display "Han 1" at the left end to "Han 4" at the right end, and the hold display is shifted in descending order as the hold is exhausted. Then, when the hold display which is in the “hold 1” at the left end of the second hold number display unit 197 is used up, the change information display unit 195 is displayed as in the case of the first hold number display unit 196. To move to.

The display mode of the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 and the display mode of the variation information display 198 in the variation information display unit 195 are not limited to still images, It may be a predetermined moving image. Furthermore, the display mode of the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 may change from a still image to a moving image or a moving image to a still image at a predetermined timing. Good.

Further, with respect to the hold display, it is possible to perform the display according to various game states. For example, it is possible to exemplify that the mode of holding display is different depending on whether the probability of the big hit lottery is the normal probability or the high probability. In addition, when changing the hold display mode according to the game state, it is possible to delay or advance the timing of starting or ending the change related to the hold display with respect to the timing when the corresponding game state occurs. Is.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first number-of-holds display unit 196, the second number-of-holds display unit 197, and the variation information display unit 195 is not limited to that described above, and various display modes can be adopted. is there. For example, the second hold number display unit 197 is moved to the left side of the first hold number display unit 196 in FIG. 7A when viewed from the player, and eight hold displays are displayed on the left side of the variation information display unit 195. It may be possible to arrange them side by side. As another example, when the time saving game state and the entry facilitation state are set as the game state, only the second hold display is taken into consideration in consideration that the second hold is often given priority and is often digested without interruption. May be performed.

The mode of such a hold display does not prioritize the execution of the second game over the first game as in the present embodiment, but special symbols and effects in the order of occurrence of the start winnings related to the first game and the second game. It is conceivable to adopt it in a pachinko game machine of the type that performs variable display of the design 190. In addition, as described above, in the case where the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 are continuously arranged, the position of the fluctuation information display unit 195 is the lower center of the display area 194, For example, the lower right part can be exemplified.

Further, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, as described above, the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197. , And any or all of the fluctuation information display section 195 may be displayed on a small display body.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notice effect using the above-mentioned hold display or the variation information display 198 may be performed, but these notice effects will be described later.
<<Stand-Ahead Look-Ahead Performance Related to Special Designs>>

Next, the hold prefetching effect, which is one of the notice effects related to the special symbol, will be described. In the following, the "holding prefetching effect" may be simply referred to as "prefetching effect". This prefetching effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned reserved storage information (first special figure reserved storage information or second reserved storage information). Furthermore, the look-ahead effect uses the function of the advance information notification described above, and a reach or a big hit occurs with respect to a hold in which the digestion is performed after the effect performed using the effect design 190 or the like at that time. It is executed as an effect for notifying the expectation of a thing.

For example, by performing a green hold display, unlike the blue display that is the basic display mode, with respect to the hold display generated at the position of "hold 3" in the first hold number display unit 196 described above, It is shown that the degree of expectation of the occurrence of reach and the like is higher than that in the case of the normal blue mode. In addition to the colors of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, iridescent, and predetermined pattern are provided, and expectation of big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, iridescent, and predetermined pattern rather than green. The production is performed to show that the degree is high.

Here, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe pattern or a display mode including a predetermined character image can be exemplified. Further, it is possible to adopt not only the color and pattern of the hold display, but also an item other than a perfect circle, a person image, a character string, or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the look-ahead effect by combining the above-described various display modes with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed and an additional object (for example, a display of a burning flame effect). In addition, the hold held for the prefetching effect can be referred to as, for example, “trigger hold” or “the hold”.

The prefetching effect related to the hold as described above may be performed in the second game as well. As for the second game, it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, iridescent, and a predetermined pattern in addition to the basic color orange as described above. Also, as the hold display related to the second game, it is possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like.

Further, the prefetch effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as “hold change”. In addition, such "holding change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold generation, a display mode change at a timing after the hold generation, and the like. is there.

Among these, as a change in the display mode at a timing after the hold is generated, for example, a hold occurs and the hold display is started, the hold progresses, and the hold display indicates “hold 2”, It is possible to exemplify an example in which the hold display changes while proceeding to "hold 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold display is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "Hold 3", and when moving to the position of "Hold 1", another color such as green. It changes to.

In addition, for both the first game and the second game, when the hold display is moved from “Hold 1” to the variation information display unit 195 and becomes the variation information display 198, for example, in the basic color. When the expectation of a big hit is displayed by changing from a certain blue or orange color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, or a predetermined pattern, or a display mode such as an item or a person image other than a perfect circle. is there. Since the second game is generally played only in the advantageous game state (time saving, easy to enter), there is a case where a disadvantage display indicating the possibility of ending the advantageous game state is displayed.
<<Control Mode Related to Hold-ahead Look-ahead Production>>

Furthermore, the following can be illustrated as a control aspect related to the above-mentioned hold change. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining an effect pattern of a hold change (hold change pattern) is performed. A hold change pattern table is used for this hold change pattern lottery, and this hold change pattern table indicates the presence/absence of a hold change and, when executing a hold change (when there is a hold change), what timing In this case, matters relating to the determination of the effect pattern such as what kind of display mode is executed are defined. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Furthermore, as the pending change patterns with pending changes that can be selected by the pending change pattern lottery as described above, the following can be exemplified. For example, with respect to the first game, three hold displays of "Hold 1" to "Hold 3" have already been performed, a new hold has occurred, and the hold display has been performed at the position of "Hour 4". And At this time, the blue color, which is the basic color, is displayed in a suspended manner, and thereafter, the variable display related to the effect design 190 is sequentially ended, and the standby order related to the hold is advanced.

Further, the hold display that was on "Hold 4" is sequentially shifted to "Hold 3", "Hold 2", and "Hold 1", and the hold change is performed each time this shift is performed. Then, the color of the hold display is changed from blue at the position of "Hold 4" to green at the position of "Hold 3", red at the position of "Hold 2", gold at the position of "Hold 1". The information display portion 195 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) sequentially changes to a rainbow color. That is, as the waiting order for holding increases, the holding display changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit is high. Such a hold change pattern can be referred to as a hold change every time the display position changes.

Further, as another hold change pattern, for example, as in the above-mentioned example, when the hold display is performed on "hold 4", the display is blue, and the display of this basic color is "hold 2". It continues until it is displayed in the position of ". Then, when this hold display moves to "Hold 1", the display mode changes to red or rainbow. Such a hold change pattern can be referred to as a hold change that does not occur until the hold exhaustion approaches and the hold display reaches a predetermined display position “hold 1”.

Note that the various pending change patterns described above are merely examples, and various aspects other than these can be provided in the pending change pattern table.

In addition, when there are a plurality of holdings corresponding to the holding change in "holding 1" to "holding 4", it is possible to cancel one of the look-ahead effects. More specifically, for example, when "Hold 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hold 4" hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any hold that has occurred earlier, If the hold change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is hit, the hold change related to the "hold 4" described above can be canceled and not executed.

Further, for example, when “Hold 4” occurs, as in the above example, the hold related to “Hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color, and all the hold that occurred earlier. However, as long as the iridescent color does not change and only the green color or the like changes to the hold change, the hold change that has occurred first can be canceled and not executed. In addition, the lottery related to the hold prefetch is not limited to winning a prize, but at the start of a new change, that is, from holding 1 to holding N (where N is a natural number of 2 or more) from holding to the target holding. May be selected and the lottery may be executed. Here, in the present embodiment, with respect to the hold prefetch lottery, the lottery process is performed by using the information (advance notification information) regarding the values of the winning random number, the pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number, which are determined at the time of winning by the main board 102 and transmitted. I'm trying to run.
<<Continuous notice regarding special symbols>>

Next, as another effect pattern, a continuous notice (continuous effect) relating to a special symbol will be described. This continuous notice includes a genuine one and a pseudo one, and the genuine continuous notice among them means that a continuous notice effect is produced over a plurality of variable displays related to a special symbol. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that, with respect to one variation display related to the special symbol, intermittent notice production is performed as if the special symbol changed a plurality of times.

In addition, in the "continuous notice" in the present embodiment, compared to a normal effect that can be most often performed when the big hit lottery is out, a special effect such as giving some kind of notice is continuously performed a plurality of times. It means that it is done. Furthermore, as "specialistic production," scene settings with a relatively low appearance frequency are used compared to production patterns with reach, production scene patterns with the highest appearance frequency, and production patterns that include characters. A production pattern including characters and characters can be exemplified.

Then, as the "continuous notice", more specifically, for example, over a predetermined number of times of fluctuations related to the special symbol, the production of the pattern of the same system is stopped every time (the production design 190 of the same color that is not the same pattern is stopped. Can be illustrated. In addition, as the “continuous notice” of other modes, for example, the character that is the main character in the story in the production is sequentially changed for each change of the special symbol, aiming for the room that is the final goal. It is possible to exemplify things such as moving to a room (special stage notice). In addition, as another form of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character, against every single change related to the special symbol, wins by fighting against a different enemy and aims at the final target enemy. You can also exemplify anything (battle mission notice, battle zone notice).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be given based on the advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the "Hold 3" is held, the sub-main board 301 is used as an effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the special symbol after that. It is possible to select, for example, a content that includes continuous notice over three variable displays.

Then, when the one-time hold is exhausted and the above-mentioned “hold 3” hold is shifted to the “hold 2” position, the first one of the effect patterns related to the selected continuous notice is selected. The effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Further, when the hold is sequentially exhausted and the hold display moves from "Hold 2" to "Hold 1", the second notice of three times is executed, and the fluctuation information display is started from "Hold 1". When moving to the section 195, the final third notice is executed.

In the sub-main substrate 301, the change pattern relating to the change display being executed at the time when the above-mentioned “holding 3” is held or the “holding 2” or “holding 1” occurring before that is displayed. It is also possible to confirm the pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "hold 3" is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is executed, or a jackpot is generated among various kinds of information already stored. If there is information indicating that the effect is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous notice selected when the "hold 3" is held.

Here, it is also possible to make the above-mentioned effect mode of the pending change one mode of the effect related to the continuous announcement.

Further, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter, may be referred to as “pseudo continuous notice”), reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern relating to one variable display of the special symbol. Such a thing, a thing in which a character repeats a plurality of actions can be exemplified.

It should be noted that the content of the continuous announcement as described above is merely an example, and various contents other than those described can be adopted as the content of the continuous announcement.
<< production design related to ordinary design >>

Next, the effect related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect related to the normal symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Then, in the case of performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in this way, as the effect symbol, for example, it is conceivable to perform the display of such a degree that the deviance and the type of hit can be distinguished.

More specifically, for example, as shown in the universal figure production display unit 199 in FIGS. 7A and 7B, two rectangular frames of about several millimeters square are displayed side by side, and the inside of each frame is displayed. Enable to display in red or blue. Then, when the result of the winning/discarding lottery related to the ordinary symbol is out of alignment, for example, both frames are displayed in blue, and this is set as the outlying symbol related to the ordinary symbol. Furthermore, when the result of the winning/discarding lottery related to the ordinary symbol is any hit, one or both of both frames are displayed in red according to the kind of hit, and these are hits related to the ordinary symbol. It is possible to use a design.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect design (199) related to the normal design is, for example, small size. It may be displayed on any display body. Further, at a predetermined portion of the above-described center decoration 64, for example, an LED display lamp including two as a set may be provided, and this may be used as an effect symbol display device related to a normal symbol.
<<Display of hold effect related to normal design>>

Next, the hold effect display related to the above-mentioned normal symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the holding effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the hold effect display related to the normal symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to the normal symbol is, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator light that is a set of two is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and thereby, the effect display of the number of holdings related to the normal symbols of "1" to "4" is performed. Good.
<<Production related to limited frequency pattern>>

Next, an effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “limited frequency pattern effect”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the effect pattern described above. Furthermore, the limited frequency effect pattern effect is an effect based on a pattern that is set so as to easily appear in a predetermined game state. The content of the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content showing a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, one that fuels the expectation that reach with high reliability can be exemplified. Further, some of the effect patterns related to the limited frequency effect pattern effect may include effect patterns related to reach.

Examples of the game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear include, for example, at the start of the game, immediately after the predetermined effect pattern is executed, during the predetermined effect mode, immediately after the end of the special game, during the specific game, and the like. it can. In addition to these, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, it is possible to exemplify a case where the number of holdings related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four). ..

Examples of control modes related to such limited frequency pattern effects include the following. For example, the above-described variation pattern table on the main board 102 includes a plurality of variation patterns (limited frequency variation patterns) associated with limited frequency pattern effects. Then, a limited frequency pattern table is configured in a part of the variation pattern table by the plurality of limited frequency variation patterns.

As described above, this limited frequency pattern table is used in a predetermined game situation such as at the start of the game, immediately after the end of the special game, or a predetermined period after the end of the special game and after a predetermined number of changes. Then, on the main board 102, it is determined whether or not it is a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern table should be used. Further, in a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern table is to be used, on the main board 102, the selection range of the variation pattern is limited within the limited frequency pattern table, and the variation pattern within the limited frequency pattern table (limited frequency variation pattern ) Is selected.

Then, the main board 102 transmits a command including information related to the selected variation pattern to the sub-main board 301, and the sub-main board 301 determines the effect pattern associated with the selected variation pattern. It

The variation patterns in the limited frequency pattern table on the main board 102 may include variation patterns (non-limited frequency variation patterns) that are not associated with limited frequency pattern effects. By doing so, when the non-limited frequency variation pattern is selected, the limited frequency pattern effect may not appear even in the above-mentioned predetermined game situation.

Further, even in the above-mentioned predetermined game situation, it is possible to make the appearance rate of the limited frequency pattern effect different for each game situation. As such a control mode, for example, at the start of a game, a limited frequency pattern effect is executed at a rate of 100%, immediately after another predetermined effect pattern is executed, during a predetermined effect mode, immediately after the end of a special game. It is possible to exemplify that the limited frequency pattern effect is not executed during the specific game. Furthermore, when determining the limited frequency table to be used after the end of the special game, it may be controlled differently depending on the game state before the execution of the special game. According to this, it is easy to reach when entering a time-saving game and a state where it is easy to enter a ball, and when a big hit during a time-saving game (so-called condominium), priority is given to variable efficiency to reduce the reach frequency. You can also choose to select.

The determination as to whether or not the game is started as described above is performed by, for example, detecting the presence/absence of an operation relating to the firing handle 20 by the main board 102, and firing the firing handle 20 for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 minute). It can be performed by determining that the game is started when there is no operation related to and the operation of the firing handle 20 is detected thereafter.

It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the limited frequency pattern effect on the sub-main substrate 301 side. In this case, for example, in the sub-main substrate 301, it is determined whether or not a predetermined effect pattern is executed, or whether or not a predetermined effect mode is being performed, and when the predetermined effect pattern is executed. Alternatively, it is possible to execute the limited frequency pattern effect when the predetermined effect mode is in effect.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when a small hit is adopted as the type of hit, for example, at the start of variation of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) after the occurrence of the small hit, the main board It is also possible to determine the variation pattern by referring to the limited frequency pattern table in 102. Further, it is also possible to continuously execute the limited frequency pattern effect in the variable display related to the special symbol a plurality of times (for example, 10 times or 20 times) after the occurrence of the small hit. Further, for the first game and the second game, a difference regarding the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect is provided, and for example, for the first special symbol, the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect is set to 10 and the second special symbol. Regarding, it is also possible to set the limited frequency pattern effect to be continued 20 times. Further, it is possible to change the reference pattern of the limited frequency after the end of the special game according to the winning symbol. More specifically, for example, a limited frequency pattern table A and a limited frequency pattern table B that are different from each other are provided, and (a) in the case of a predetermined winning symbol, the limited frequency pattern table A and the limited frequency pattern table B are in this order. , 10 times are alternately used until the total number of fluctuations reaches 100 times, (a) In the case of other winning symbols, the order is exchanged, and the change is made in the order of the limited frequency pattern table B and the limited frequency pattern table A. It is also possible to perform control such that the number of times is used 10 times alternately until the total number of times reaches 100 times.
<<Production related to the long opening of the second start winning hole>>

Next, the effect related to the above-described long opening will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect (an effect for long opening) related to the long opening of the second start winning opening 63 (normal long opening) is executed using the effect display device 60, the speaker 21, and the like. There are cases. Then, as a long opening effect related to the normal long opening, an open lottery effect indicating whether or not the normal long opening is executed, and a long opening effect executed corresponding to the result of the open lottery effect. (Open lottery result presentation) is provided. In the following, the normal long opening may be simply referred to as “long opening”.

Among these, as the open lottery effect, for example, an effect of contents for fueling the expectation that the normal time opening will be performed during the change of the normal symbol or at the stage before the change starts. More specifically, for example, whether or not it is possible to secure an area for displaying the above-mentioned second hold number display portion 197 by causing a specific character to appear in the lower corner portion of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 or the like. For example, it is possible to display the situation by a moving image.

Such an effect pattern does not directly display the state of the lottery, but can also be expressed as "opening fan effect", "pre-opening stage effect", or the like. Then, in the effect contents, when the purpose is achieved, the long opening is executed thereafter, and when the purpose cannot be achieved, the long opening is not executed thereafter, and the like. In addition, when the additional display body is provided as described above, the open lottery effect can be performed on the additional display body.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect patterns, it is possible to employ a method for directly displaying the lottery situation. As such a direct open lottery effect, for example, a roulette wheel, a fortune ticket, or a two-digit pattern matching that displays a moving image related to the lottery can be exemplified. Furthermore, in the case of winning the normal long opening in the winning lottery related to the above-mentioned regular symbols, the opening lottery effect of the content indicating the winning is executed, and when it is not winning the normal long opening, it falls off. It is conceivable that the open lottery effect having the content indicating is executed.

Further, in the case where the open lottery effect of the content indicating the outlier or the content that cannot achieve the purpose is not hitting the long opening at the normal time, and the effect pattern related to the open lottery effect is selected with a predetermined probability. To be executed. Further, as a case of selecting an effect pattern related to the out-of-range open lottery effect, there is a case of being selected by the main board 102 or a case of being independently selected by the sub-main board 301. In the present embodiment, the open lottery effect is executed with a high probability (for example, 100%) when the normal long opening is won, and when the normal long open is not won, a low probability ( For example, about 0.1%).

Further, it is possible to variously set the relationship between the contents of the open lottery effect and the opening pattern of the second starting winning opening 63. For example, an effect using roulette is adopted as the content of the open lottery effect, and “open”, “x”, “chance”, “reach”, etc. are assigned to the options provided as the eyes of the roulette. Then, when the player does not win the long opening at the normal time, the state where "x" is selected as the content of the open lottery effect is displayed, and the second starting winning opening 63 is not opened or only the short opening is performed. To do so.

Further, when the player normally wins the long opening, the effect of selecting "open" in the roulette is executed, and the long opening is always performed. Further, in addition to this, in the effect related to the effect design 190, when the effect of the content that develops in stages or the effect of the content that develops into the super reach is executed, in the roulette related to the open lottery effect, It is conceivable to display a state in which “chance” or “reach” is selected and not to open the second start winning opening 63, or to perform only short opening.

In addition, the above-mentioned opening lottery effect (the above-mentioned opening fanning effect or pre-opening stage effect) and the effect indicating whether or not there is a long opening (opening lottery result effect) is the effect for the second start winning opening 63. Normally, it is positioned as a special effect related to long opening, but in terms of control, there is a direct relationship with the control mode that directly associates the long opening with the open lottery result effect. There may be no control mode.

Among these, the control mode in which the direct relationship is established is a mode in which the command related to the mode of opening the second starting winning opening 63 is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301, and the direct relationship is The control mode which is not attached is a mode in which the sub-main board 301 side executes the long opening effect without grasping the opening mode of the second starting winning opening 63. In the present embodiment, with respect to the long opening effect, a control mode in which the long opening and the long opening effect are directly related is adopted, but a control mode in which the direct relationship is not performed is adopted. It is also possible to include it in the section.

In addition, such a long opening effect may be performed in connection with the above-mentioned hold related to the normal symbol. That is, the hold lottery value related to the ordinary symbol is pre-determined during the hold, and depending on the result of the pre-determination, a long opening effect having a meaning such as a notice or agitation may be executed with a predetermined probability. The notice effect based on such a preliminary determination is included in the above-mentioned “look-ahead effect”. The pre-reading effect related to such a normal symbol can be performed in the same manner as the pre-reading effect related to the special symbol to be described later, and in this embodiment, advance notification information related to the passage of the operating port (68a or 68b). (Normal symbol prefetch command) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern for the long opening effect is selected regardless of the number of holdings, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of holdings is large, for example, the effect time is short. The effect pattern of the effect for long opening may be selected.
<<Production using operation buttons>>

Next, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect”) using the operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) described above will be described. The operation button 22 is operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he or she is participating in the effect of the game or the lottery. .. As the button effect, for example, in the variable display process of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), “Push” and “continuous hit” are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 together with the symbol of the operation button 22. It is possible to exemplify that a guide display for urging an operation is displayed, such as characters such as “Go”, “Press and hold”, or a moving image of an indicator showing the remaining time of the operation valid period.

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the guide display described above, an effect in which the character makes a comment or an effect in which the teammate character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. In addition, it is also possible to exemplify a device that operates the operation button 22 to activate the movable effect member 93 and the like to notify that the reach is reached. Furthermore, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect, and in that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the movable effect member 93 and the like described above actuate to give a big hit expectation.

Further, regarding the above-described operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but during the button performance, the operation of the operation button 22 is enabled during the button operation valid period. The button operation effective period is a preset fixed time.

In addition, by combining a vibration motor (not shown) with the operation button 22, a vibration effect for vibrating the operation button 22 or an operation range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a drive source such as a motor. It is also possible to adopt a production mode such as plunging. Further, when the operation button 22 is projected and retracted, the protrusion amount can be set relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to the one having a small outer dimension (for example, about several centimeters), and may be a hemispherical one having about ten and several centimeters. Further, as the operation input device such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted. For example, the operation handle of the car, the operation lever of the aircraft, the model of the character, which are related to the effect contents. (Figure), dial (dial) type operation unit, and touch panel type operation unit that doubles as an image display unit can also be adopted. Further, it is also possible to provide a relatively small operation button 22 and an operation lever or the like having a form so that they can be used properly according to the situation such as effect contents.
<<Production when a big hit occurs>>

Next, an effect when a big hit occurs will be described. The effects when a big hit occurs include effects before the special game starts, effects during the special game, effects after the special game, and the like. Among these, the effects before the special game include effects when the combination of the effect symbols 190 is fixed (when the symbol is fixed), effects when the effect symbols are stopped to be fixed (during symbol determination), and effects for right-handing guidance, etc. It is included.

Then, as the effect at the time of design determination, for example, the above-described effect pattern 190 is displayed while maintaining a combination of big hits such as “111” and “777 (display corresponding to maximum profit)”, and then a big hit of the effect design 190 A combination of “111” and “777” can be maintained, or a combination of “111” and “777” can be changed (promoted) to a combination of “777”. Further, as the effect during the symbol determination, for example, the combination of “111” and “777” described above can be used to stop the effect symbol 190 and stop the display of the effect symbol 190 combination. Further, as an effect of right-handing guidance, it is possible to exemplify a content of instructing the player to perform right-handing in which the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 is increased so that the player can easily win a prize at the special winning opening 92.

As an example of the above-mentioned effect during the special game, a moving image with contents that cannot be seen unless the player wins the big hit can be illustrated. At this time, a predetermined music piece is output from the above-mentioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). In addition, as the video during the special game, for example, a scene in which a predetermined character in a dramatic picture adopted for the production of the Pachinko game machine 10 fights against a rival enemy or a scene in which he or she enjoys a mockery is depicted. It is possible to exemplify the ones.

More specifically, for example, when the special winning opening of the first round in the special game is opened, the characters start fighting each other, and from the second round to the final round, switching between rounds and characters You can exemplify that the battle between the characters ends when the final round ends and the big prize hole closes. It should be noted that the switching of the rounds during the special game is performed by, for example, “1R”, “2R”,... In the corners (for example, the upper right corner) of the display area 194 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). , “15R”, “16R”, and the like. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of times of a big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, all types of jackpots are accompanied by a bonus such as a certainty change and a reduction in time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a big hit without any certainty change. If the type of big hit includes a big hit that does not involve a certainty change, the notification of whether or not the certainty change will occur after the end of the special game will not be notified until during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

For example, when a total of 16 rounds of special games are played, there is no effect to inform the player whether or not they are hitting a probability change until the end of the 10th round. Adopting an effect or control mode in which, when a first entry into the winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is detected, if an unexpected change is made, an effect to that effect is given. Is possible.

Similarly, in a pachinko game machine that includes a big hit without probability change, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing such as before the special game starts, during the special game, or when the special game ends. It is also possible to adopt an effect or control mode in which the probability changes.

In this case, for example, a ball entrance device having a game ball detection area (herein referred to as a "V ball entrance device"), a portion below the second special winning opening 92 in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1), and the like. In addition to. Further, at a predetermined timing such as when the special game ends, the V ball entry device is set to a state in which the game ball can be received, and in this state, when the game ball is detected by the V ball entry device, the probability state thereafter is , The control is performed so that the probability change state is maintained over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V ball entering device, or when the game ball does not enter a predetermined area in the V ball entering device, control is performed so that the probability state thereafter does not become a probable state. It is possible to do so.

Further, it is possible to give such a probability change by entering a ball only as an effect. That is, when a big hit with a certain change occurs in the big hit lottery, the V ball entry device is brought into a state where the game ball can be received at a predetermined timing. Then, if a distribution mechanism is provided in the V-ball entry device and a big hit with a certain change has been hit in advance, the game ball that has entered the V-ball entry device is guided to the area of the certain change, and the player makes a certain change. Perform the effect of having acquired. Further, in the case of hitting a jackpot without a certainty change in advance, it is possible to guide the game ball to a non-probable (normal) region and execute an effect that the player has obtained a certainty change.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, an example relating to the result of the effect contents during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the fight between the characters. Such an effect after the special game can be called an ending effect.

Further, as the effect after the special game, an example in which the number of consecutive big hits is additionally displayed and a case in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the special game at that time are displayed can be exemplified. It is also possible to additionally display the number of times of a big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits continue. In addition, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of occurrences of big hits reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, it is not possible to tell whether the small hit is generated, or during the game after the small hit is the same as in the normal time, and it is not possible to distinguish whether or not it is in a positive change. It is possible to produce contents.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. In the following, the commands related to the ordinary electric accessory and the other main commands will be described separately, but here, the main commands other than the commands related to the ordinary electric accessory will be described first. First, as the transmission timing of the command, during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts, when the symbol of the special symbol is confirmed, during the symbol determination of the special symbol, during the big hit start demonstration, When the big hit middle and big prize opening is open, when the big hit middle and big winning opening is closed, when the winning end demonstration, when the big hit ending demonstration ends. Among these, during the initial screen display, it is a period from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the start of the customer waiting demo until the steady state is entered. In addition, at the time of winning the start prize, at the time of recovery from power failure, and at the time of detecting an error, command transmission is performed in any case. Further, command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

Among these, commands for clearing the RWM include commands for effect display initialization, effect LED initialization, and various errors. The effect display device initialization command is for displaying a predetermined off symbol on the effect display device 60 (initial symbol when RWM is cleared). The effect LED initialization command is to turn on a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying an effect according to the error state.

There is a customer waiting demo command as a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erasing the voice.

As the command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the number of symbols 1 stored, the number of symbols 2 stored, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of performances A to Z, the production selection states 0 to 2, the variation additional information, the design 1 production There are commands for a pattern, a symbol 2 effect pattern, a symbol 1 character effect, and a pattern 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of pending storage of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of pending storage of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands for the effect counts A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the limited frequency table described above, and the various commands in the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. It is a thing. The variation additional information command indicates information for adjusting the variation time. The symbol 1 production pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 production pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

As a command when the symbol of the special symbol is fixed, there are commands for stopping the symbol 1 effect pattern and stopping the symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbols 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

As the command during the symbol determination of the special symbol, the variation time reduction number 0 (at low probability), the variation time reduction number AZ (at low probability), the variation time reduction number 0 (at high probability), probability variation ( Commands up to a predetermined number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands relating to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time saving display, and the like.

The commands at the time of big hit start demonstration include a symbol 1 big hit start demo, a symbol 2 big hit start demo, and a command for designating a launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for informing the launch position in the case of causing the player to strike a game ball between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 by so-called left hitting or right hitting. belongs to.

The launch position designation command causes the player to hit a game ball between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 by so-called left hitting or right hitting, as in the big hit start demonstration. In this case, the firing position is notified.

As commands for opening the big hit middle and big winning opening, there are commands of demo 1 to 16 for symbol 1 big hit and demos 1 to 16 for symbol 2 big hit. These are for displaying effects based on the big hit symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command at the time of closing the big hit middle and big winning opening, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the special winning opening closing effect.

As commands at the time of a hit end demo, there are commands of a symbol 1 hit end demo and a symbol 2 hit end demo. These are for displaying the hit end demonstration effect based on the hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

There is a firing position designation command as a command at the end of the big hit demonstration. This is because when it is necessary to distinguish firing positions due to the positional relationship among the first start winning opening 62, the second starting winning opening 63, the first big winning opening 91, and the second big winning opening 92. , For notifying the launch position.

As commands at the time of starting winning, there are commands of winning notice (winning notice effect), symbol notice (winning symbol notice effect), variation notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number. Each of the winning notice, the symbol notice, and the variation notice command is a command (prefetch command) related to the above-mentioned prefetch effect by the advance information notifying unit 157. Then, the winning advance notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the winning and rejecting random number, and includes winning and winning information according to the lottery probability. The symbol notice command is for transmitting a random number value range of symbol random numbers, and includes information relating to the type of winning. Furthermore, the fluctuation notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, or the like). The number of symbols 1 memory, the command of number of symbols 2 memory is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in the present embodiment, the result of the win/loss lottery, the information such as the presence or absence of the pre-reading effect, the period, and the like are transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 by each of the winning notice, the symbol notice, and the variation notice command (the above-mentioned notice information). It is like this. It should be noted that the details of the commands of these winning notices (winning notice effects), symbol notices (winning symbol notice effects) and fluctuation notices (pattern notice effects) will be described later.

As the command at the time of power failure recovery, communication inspection 1, communication test 2, power failure recovery gaming states A to E, number of effects AZ, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect, There is a command of power interruption recovery hit state, power interruption recovery special symbol 1 state, power interruption recovery special symbol 2 state, firing position designation, errors a to d, symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number.

The commands of the communication inspection 1 and the communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands in the game states A to E for recovering from power failure are for transmitting different commands depending on the game status at the time of power failure. The commands of the effect numbers A to Z show the number of times of the effects according to the limited frequency table described above, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 show the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect, the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting a different command depending on whether or not it is hit. Special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, the command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, depending on the state such as waiting, changing, hit It is for. The firing position designation command is for designating an appropriate firing position according to the situation, as described above. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence or absence and the type of error. The number of symbols 1 memory, the command of number of symbols 2 memory is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

Next, a main control process in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "condition device", and "continuous accessory operating device" used below will be explained. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Among them, the "special electric accessory" is to activate the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92. It will be. Further, the "condition device" is operated when a game ball that has entered the first big winning opening 91 or the second big winning opening 92 is detected, and the "feature continuous operation device" is a special electric winning combination. An object can be continuously operated multiple times.

The main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is the control start processing shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game progress interrupt processing shown in FIG. 13, and the power-off processing shown in FIG. Are performed on the main board 102.
<Control start processing>

The control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is a control process started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed when the power of the pachinko game machine 10 is turned on, and this control start process will be described later. After performing the necessary settings (S1 to S4) at power-on, the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5) and the power-off information flag (power-off confirmation information) in the power-off status confirmation processing (S6 to S8) Corresponding to the value and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, the process at power-off recovery (S9 to S17), the process at initialization of RWM (S24 to S26), the time setting for the game progress interrupt Processing (S27), circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)), etc. are executed.
<<Settings required at power-on>>

As the settings required when the power is turned on, the stack pointer setting (S1), the interrupt mode setting (S2), and the access permission setting (S3) to the RWM 503 are performed, and then the internal registers are initialized. S4).

In the process of setting the stack pointer (S1) among these, in order to secure the stack area, the stack pointer is set as an initial value of the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is set to a specific address. Next, in the interrupt mode setting (S2), a mode of a predetermined number is set, and in the RWM access permission setting (S3), access permission data is set in a predetermined register to permit access to the RWM. To do. As a result, the maskable interrupt is set to a specific interrupt mode, and the CPU built-in RWM is allowed to access. Further, in the setting of the built-in register (S4), various set values such as the game progress interrupt use set value and the clock source selection value are set by using the built-in register initial setting table. The interrupt on the main board 102 will be described later.
<<Check operation status of RWM clear switch>>

In the process of confirming the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the state of the output signal of the initialization switch 544 input via the input port is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been pressed (turned on), and if not (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag in the power-off status determination process (S6 to S8) described later. The determination process (S6) is performed. On the other hand, if the initialization switch 544 is pressed (S5: YES), the processing of RWM initialization (S24 to S26) is performed.

Here, it is determined that the initialization switch 544 has been operated when the RWM clear switch bit of the corresponding input port is determined to be ON five times in succession in order to avoid initialization due to noise at power-on. In addition, the determination of the information as to whether the initialization switch 544 has been pressed is performed only once at this time, and the determination is not performed thereafter.

Further, in the process of checking the state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the RWM start address (address) is set as a reference value of the relative address, the number of input confirmation times (here, 5 times) is set, and the corresponding input port is set. Control processing such as input of a value, inspection of the RWM clear switch bit in the value of the input port, confirmation of the inspection result, input confirmation repeated for the set number of input confirmations, and the like are executed.
<<Status confirmation process during power failure>>

In the power-off state confirmation process (S6 to S8) when the initialization switch 544 is not operated, the value of the power-off information flag is read, and whether the read value matches the predetermined power-off normal data. It is determined whether or not (S6). The power-off normal data is stored when the power-off process is normally performed when the power is turned off (power-off). Then, if the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data and the determination result in S6 is NO, the control process will be described later as in the case where the initialization switch 544 is operated. The process proceeds to the RWM initialization process (from S24).

If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (S6: YES), the checksum data is calculated (S7). In the process of calculating the checksum data, although not shown, an initial value is set as the checksum data, a predetermined calculation is performed on the checksum data, and the checksum data after the calculation is 0. Is determined.

When the checksum data is not 0 (S8: NO), that is, when the restart preparation process execution condition is not satisfied, the RWM head upper position is set to the upper position of the reference value of the relative address. The process proceeds to the initialization process (from S24). On the other hand, when the checksum data is 0 (S8: YES), the process proceeds to the power-off recovery process (S9 to S17) described later.
<<Process when power is restored>>

In the process when power is restored, the value of the stack pointer buffer is set in the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is returned to the value saved when the power was shut off (S9). Further, in order to inspect the communication line between the main board 102 and the sub-board 104, a request for transmitting a production control command to the sub-board 104 is made (S10, S11), a decoration lamp (game effect lamp) and a sound effect (sound). In order to return the effect of (effect) to the state before the power-off occurs, a request for transmitting an effect control command to the sub-board 104 is made (S10, S11). Further, in order to request a command corresponding to the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol display device, a symbol storage number command request process is executed (S12).

Further, the solenoid is returned to the output state before the power failure occurred (S13). Specifically, in order to restore the open/closed state of the second start winning opening 63, the first big winning opening 91, and the second big winning opening 92 to the state before the power is turned off, the ordinary electric auditor solenoid 76, the big winning The solenoid actuation bits for the mouth solenoids 80, 81 are checked in sequence. When the solenoid actuation bit of the normal electric accessory solenoid control is on, it is determined that the second start winning port 63 is open before the power is turned off, and the second starting winning port 63 is opened. Store in accessory solenoid control. Subsequently, when the solenoid actuation bit of the first big winning solenoid control is ON, it is determined that the first big winning opening 91 is open before the power is turned off, and the first big winning opening 91 is opened. Is stored in the normal electric accessory solenoid control. When the solenoid actuation bit of the second prize winning solenoid control is on, it is determined that the second prize winning opening 92 is open before the power is turned off, and the first prize winning opening 91 is opened. Stored in the normal electric accessory solenoid control.

After that, the process proceeds to the subsequent process of setting special symbols (S14), and information on the operating state of the probability varying function of the special symbol display device (70, 71) is set. In this process, the value of the special symbol mode flag is loaded (in other words, the value of the special symbol mode flag is incorporated) and stored in a predetermined register. Next, power recovery setting (S15) and data storage processing (S16) are executed, and communication line abnormality detection setting with the payout control board (S17) is executed. Here, the address of the error flag is set. Is set, and the communication line abnormality bit of the contents of the error 1 flag is set.

Next, in the process of starting the game progress interrupt process, the address of the PTC0 counter setting register is set in order to activate the game progress interrupt, and the count value of a predetermined size (corresponding to about 4 ms here) is set to the PTC0 counter. It is set in the register (S18). As a result, a game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms.

Then, a process of restoring various registers other than the flag register is executed (S19), and a process of determining whether or not the state at the time of the power failure is the interrupt permission (S20) is executed. If the interrupt is disabled at the time of power-off (S20: NO), the flag register is restored (S21), and the control process is turned off based on the restart index information set in the stack pointer. Return to the processing of the address before the occurrence. On the other hand, if the interrupt is enabled when the power is turned off (S20: YES), the flag register is restored (S22), the interrupt is enabled (S23), and then set in the stack pointer. The control processing is returned to the processing to be returned to before the occurrence of the power failure based on the restart index information being maintained.

Here, the reason why the flag register is restored separately from the other registers is that the flag register stores information on the gaming state such as a probability change, and the control processing is turned off as much as possible to restore such information. This is because it is performed immediately before returning to before occurrence of.
<<Processing when RWM is initialized>>

In the processing (S24 to S28) at the time of initializing the RWM, after clearing the RWM area (S24), initial setting of the RWM (S25), initialization of the effect display device (effect display device 60) (S26), and Time setting for game progress interruption (S27) is performed. In the process from clearing the RWM area (S24) to initial setting of the RWM (S25), clear data (00H) is set in all the RWM areas, and the clear data is stored as a reference value of the relative address. Is incremented by 1. Further, bit 7 of this reference value is inspected, and the determination of the inspection result is executed. In the process of determining the inspection result, if the inspection result is 0, the process returns to the process of storing the clear data in the reference value, and the address of the initialization data setting table is set. Thereby, the initial value of RWM is set. The clearing of the RWM area is not limited to being performed on the entire area, and for example, only a partial area in which specific information is stored, or an area excluding an unused area is cleared. Good.

It should be noted that "H" described at the end of the numerical value, such as "00H" which is the value of the clear data described above, indicates that the numerical value is expressed in hexadecimal. In addition, in the present embodiment, numerical values representing hexadecimal numbers are marked with "H", numerical values representing binary numbers are marked with "B", and symbols indicating notations such as these are marked. Numerical values that are not shown shall be expressed in decimal.

In the initialization of the effect display device (S26), in order to initialize the effect display device 60 and request the command transmission of the error state and the incorrect prize ball monitoring information, the command request data setting is performed using the address of the effect initial command setting table as an argument. Execute the process.
<<Processing of time setting for game progress interruption>>

In the process of time setting for the game progress interrupt (S27), in order to activate the game progress interrupt, a count value of a predetermined size is set in the corresponding counter setting register, and the game progress interrupt is generated, for example, every 4 ms. ..
<<Circulation processing>>

After the time setting for the game progress interruption (S27), a recursion (restart) preparation of a predetermined timer, which is an interruption processing time monitoring means, and updating of random number related values used for generating initial values of various random numbers are performed. The circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)) is executed. In this circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)), interruption is prohibited (S28) in order to manage the gaming machine. Further, in order to prepare for recursion of the interrupt processing time monitoring means, a predetermined value as the first recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). This first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H.

Then, the initial value random number update process is executed (S30), and the normal symbol initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special symbol per soft initial value random number are updated. After that, after the interrupt is permitted (S31), the process returns to the interrupt prohibition (S28) again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S31) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interrupt permission (S28) is executed, the above-mentioned game progress interrupt becomes possible, and the game progress interrupt process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in S27. ..
<<Initial value random number update process>>

In the initial value random number update process (S30), in order to update the normal value initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special symbol soft initial value random number, the random number is updated from the initial value random number update table. The number of times is acquired, and the initial value random number is updated for the number of updates. In obtaining the number of times of updating the random number, the content (the number of random numbers) indicated by the data address (0D10H) in the column of the first row on the left column of the initial value random number updating table (see FIG. 15A) is set as the number of times of updating the random number. .. In addition, here, the number of random numbers is three per normal symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, special symbol per soft initial value random number. When updating the initial value random number per normal symbol in the initial value random number update process (S30), it is stored in the data address (0D13H) of the address (lower) of the initial value random number per normal symbol in the initial value random number update table 1 Information stored in the RWM address that is a combination of byte data and a predetermined address (upper) is used as an argument (=an initial value random number per ordinary symbol), and the maximum value of the initial value random number per ordinary symbol (data of 0D11H) is not exceeded. A 2-byte soft random number update process (described later) is executed within the range. Then, for the special symbol initial value random number and the special symbol soft initial value random number, similarly, the random number value is updated by the 2-byte soft random number updating process, and the initial value random number updating process for a total of three initial value random numbers (S30). A random number related value at is generated.

Further, in the initial value random number updating process (S30), when there is an abnormality in the random number related value, the random number related value is corrected. In the process of correcting the random number related value, a random number related value is generated based on the random number value obtained in the 2-byte soft random number updating process, and a predetermined value is subtracted from the random number related value. If the result of the subtraction is 0, the random number relation value is determined to be normal and the random number relation value is stored, but if it is less than 0, the random number relation value is determined to be normal and the maximum value of the random number relation value is determined. +1 is set as a correction value, this correction value is added to the random number relation value, and then the obtained random number relation value is stored. As a result, an abnormality in the random number relation value is detected and the abnormal random number relation value is corrected. That is, the correction of the random number related value is to perform a predetermined calculation on the random number related value and correct the random number related value when the calculation result does not reach the predetermined value.
<<2-byte soft random number update process>>

In the 2-byte soft random number update process described above, the maximum value of random numbers and the storage address of random numbers are acquired from the reference value of the input relative address, and the random numbers are updated. In obtaining the maximum value of the random number, the content indicated by the reference value +0 is lower than the random number maximum value, and the content indicated by the reference value +1 is higher than the random number maximum value. In the acquisition of the random number storage address, the content indicated by the reference value +3 is set as the lower random number storage address, and a predetermined top upper address for referring to the RWM work data storage area storing each initial value random number data is set as the random number storage address. Higher rank. When updating the random number, the random number is incremented by 1 and when it exceeds the maximum value of the random number, it is reset to 0. +1 the random number. If the result of addition exceeds the maximum value of the obtained random numbers, 0 is set. The updated random number is stored in the acquired random number storage address and then set in the output random number data. Further, the reference value +3 is set to the above reference value for output.
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, a description will be given of a game progress interrupt process which is repeated at a 4 ms period based on the period information set in the process of setting the time for game progress interrupt (S27). As shown in FIG. 13, in the game progress interrupt processing, setting of interrupt operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), interrupt permission ( S71) is sequentially performed to return to the process before the game progress interrupt is generated.

Specifically, in the process of setting the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and further the second recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursion information is a condition for recurring and restarting the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the previously set first recursion information.

In the management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the gaming machine. First, in order to monitor the input of a specific signal, an input process (S45) is executed. The targets of monitoring here are various switches mounted on the game board surface, saucer full tank switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, and short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal. Is.

Subsequently, various random number update processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Furthermore, the initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the normal random number per symbol, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number. Next, the initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the normal value per random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special symbol per soft initial value random number. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, the effective period setting process (S50) of the second starting port is executed. ..

Furthermore, the winning monitoring process (S51) is executed, and the number of payouts of prize balls is stored, the output request of the external information for the board is made, and the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 104 is performed. Then, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol actuation gate (actuation openings 68a, 68b), in order to store the random number relating to the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol actuation gate monitoring process (S53) is executed, and the ordinary symbol display device or In order to perform the process related to the normal symbol electric accessory, the normal symbol control process (S54) is executed. Furthermore, in order to monitor the variation start of the normal symbol, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol. In order to perform the processing relating to the display unit 71, the special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Subsequently, in order to perform the process related to the special electric winning combination, the special electric winning combination control process (S58) is executed, and the process related to the effective period of the first special winning opening 91 or the second special winning opening 92 is performed. The special winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is executed, and in order to monitor the variation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) is performed.

Next, in order to monitor magnetism, disconnection/short-circuit/power supply, radio wave, open/closed state of glass frame set/game board frame, and pair glass, an abnormality detection process (S61) is executed. Then, in order to detect an abnormality in the passing time of the ball entering the ball, an abnormality detecting process of the ball passing time (S62) is executed. Furthermore, in order to make a display request for the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, an error state, the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63) ) Is performed to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20 (including the operation amount state), the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is performed. In addition, the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device (70, 71), the display of the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol display device, the display of the game state, the special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times that has been operated continuously and the error.

Subsequently, in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the shooting of the game ball, a shooting control signal output process (S66) is executed, and a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output, so that a test signal output process (S67). To execute. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid, the first special winning opening opening solenoid, and the second special winning opening opening solenoid, the solenoid output processing (S68) is executed and the production control command is transmitted. In order to output the signal to the external terminal (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)), the effect control command transmission processing (S69) is executed, and thus the external information output processing (S70) is executed.

After that, interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process returns to return (RET). Then, by utilizing the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed, the above-mentioned circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)) of the control start processing is executed.
<<Input processing>>

The input process (S45) is a control module related to switch input. In this input process (S45), each switch mounted on the game board surface, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, open signal, radio wave detection signal, Also, in order to monitor the input of various signals of the touch state signal, the number of inspections, the input port address, the level mask data, the level address, and the rising mask data are acquired from the input information table, and switch input is performed for the number of inspections.

When acquiring the number of inspections, the input port address, the level mask data, the level address, and the rising mask data, the content indicated by the address (input information table+0) of the input information table is set as the number of inspections, and the input information table +1 to the input port address, Level mask data, level address, and rising mask data are acquired for the number of inspections.

In the switch input, after the acquired input port level data is created, if the acquired rising mask data is other than 0, the rising data is created. In creating the level data, the state of the bit indicated by the acquired level mask data is continuously read a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) from the acquired input port at a predetermined time period (for example, 5 μs) or more, and five times. The bits for which all of the readings of the above match are stored as the level data for this time in the acquired level address. The upper address of the level data (level upper address) is the RWM head upper address (0F0H). Further, the previous level data is stored as a bit that has not been matched even after being read five times.

When creating the rising data, in order to create the rising data of the bit indicated by the acquired rising mask data, the exclusive OR of the current level data and the previous level data is calculated, and the result of the exclusive OR and the level data of this time are calculated. Calculate the logical product. Furthermore, the logical product of the created rising data and the acquired rising mask data is calculated, and the result of this logical product is stored in the area of the address obtained by adding 1 to the address of the acquired level address.
<<Various random number update processing>>

In various random number update processing (S46), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. In the update of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is incremented by 1, and when the maximum value (232 here) is exceeded, it is set to 0, so the lower address of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number maximum The RWM update process is executed with the value +1 (223 in this case) as an argument. In updating the fluctuation pattern random number, in order to update the fluctuation pattern random number, a predetermined value (here, 3511) is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation pattern random number. When the subtracted result is less than 0, the fluctuation pattern random number maximum value+1 (here, 50000) is added to the subtracted result. The calculated result is stored in the fluctuation pattern random number.
<<Initial value update type random number update process>>

In the initial value update type random number update processing (S47), in order to update the normal symbol random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number, the initial value update type random number update table (see FIG. 15(b)) The number of random numbers to be updated, the maximum value of random numbers, the address of the initial value update type random number, and the address of the initial value work are acquired, and the initial value update type random number is updated.

When acquiring the number of random numbers to be updated, the maximum value of random numbers, the address of the initial value update type random number, and the address of the initial value work, the data address (0D30H ) Is the number of random numbers to be updated, and the maximum number of random numbers from the second row of the left column of the initial value update type random number update table, the address of the initial value update type random number, And the initial value work address are sequentially and repeatedly acquired.

In the update of the initial value update type random number, the initial value random number to be updated is acquired from the acquired initial value update type random number address (lower) and the address obtained from the address of the predetermined RWM work area (upper) Update the random number by +1. If the maximum value is exceeded, the value is set to 0. Therefore, the 2-byte soft random number update process is executed with the address in which the maximum value of the initial value update type random numbers in the initial value update type random number update table is described as an argument. As a result of execution, if the updated initial value update type random number value matches the content of the acquired initial value work, in order to update the initial value of the initial value update type random number, 2 lines below the acquired initial value work address Address (0D37H), and the contents of the initial value random number indicated by the address (0D38H) three lines down are set as new initial values, and stored in the acquired initial value update type random number address and the acquired initial value work address.
<<Initial value random number update process>>

Regarding the initial value random number updating process, the same program module as the initial value random number updating process executed in the control starting process is used, but the cycle of updating the random number related value is the cycle of the game progress interrupt (here, 4 ms). This is different from the case of being executed during the control start processing.
<<Timer subtraction process>>

In the timer subtraction process (S49), since the 2-byte timer is updated, the contents of the address of the 2-byte timer update table (address of 2-byte timer update table + 0) are used as the number of timers, and the next address (2-byte timer update The lower address of the 2-byte timer and the update of the data (various timer values) stored at the address indicated by the predetermined upper address and the obtained lower address are repeatedly performed from the address of the table+1) for the number of timers. Each time the timer value 2 is updated by 1, the number of random numbers is decremented (-1), the result of the decrement is inspected, and as a result of the inspection, the value of the number of random numbers indicating the number of remaining random numbers not updated is 0. In other cases, the remaining 2-byte timer is continuously updated. As a result of the inspection, if the value of the random number is 0, the 2-byte timer is not updated. The upper address of the 2-byte timer is the RWM work area start address (0F0H).
<<Starting Gate 2 Valid Period Setting Process>>

In the effective period setting process of the starting opening 2 (S50), in order to set the effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, a value corresponding to the value of the normal symbol status (described later) and the value of the starting opening 2 effective extension timer Is stored in (the storage area of) the starting opening 2 valid period flag. The value of the normal symbol status, and the relationship between the value stored in the starting mouth 2 effective period flag corresponding to the value of the starting mouth 2 effective extension timer, the value of the ordinary symbol is 3 which indicates that the normal electric accessory is operating. In this case, the value of the starting opening 2 effective extension timer is not set, and the predetermined starting opening 2 effective period data (1) is used as the value to be stored in the starting opening 2 effective period flag. On the other hand, when the value of the normal symbol status indicates a value other than that during the operation of the normal electric accessory, if the value of the starting opening 2 effective extension timer is not 0, a predetermined starting opening is stored as the value of the starting opening 2 effective period flag. 2 Valid period data (1) is used. Further, when the value of the normal symbol status indicates a value other than that during the operation of the normal electric auditors product, if the value of the starting opening 2 effective extension timer is 0, a predetermined starting opening is stored as a value in the starting opening 2 effective period flag. 2 Invalid period data (0) is used.
<<Winning monitoring process>>

In the winning monitoring process (S51), the number of times the prize balls are paid out is stored, a security output request is output to external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2) described above), and , In order to send a command to be sent to the production control board (here, the sub-main board 301), the content indicated by the top address (winning monitoring table +0) of the prize monitoring table is set as the number of inspections, and the number of inspections is displayed on the game board surface. The various ball winning devices (starting opening, big winning opening, etc.) are inspected through the game ball switch. As a result of the switch passage inspection, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the switch, the number of prize balls (the number of game media to be paid out) is stored, the security output request to be output to the external terminal is made, and the command transmission request is made. To do. Here, the structure of the prize monitoring table is composed of the number of times of inspection and inspection data of various game ball detection devices (game ball switches). The structure of the inspection data is switch bit data, prize ball determination data, invalid period presence/absence determination. Data, and EVENT data and MODE data for command generation to be transmitted to the effect control board.
<<Prize ball control processing>>

In the prize ball control process (S52), in order to control the payout control board 103, monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 103, command transmission request to the payout control board 103, command transmission to the payout control board 103, and payout. The reception data inspection from the control board 103 is sequentially performed. In monitoring the data reception from the payout control board 103, a data reception monitoring process is executed. In the command transmission request to the payout control board 103, payout command request processing is executed. In the command transmission to the payout control board 103 and the received data inspection from the payout control board 103, a payout command control process is executed.
<<Ordinary symbol operation gate monitoring process>>

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53), the normal symbol operation gate of the game ball (in this case, operating ports 68a, 68b) is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol operation gate is passed, it is normal. Update the number of symbol operation holding balls (the number of holding symbols normally). As a result of the update, when the passage of the game ball is confirmed when the value of the normal symbol operation holding ball number is less than 4, which is the maximum number, the random number related to the normal symbol is stored.
<<Normal symbol control processing>>

In the normal symbol control process (S54), in order to perform normal symbol display in the main control display device 53 and the process related to the normal electric auditors, the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, It executes a process (sub-module program) related to a normal symbol display or a normal electric accessory defined for each status. In the monitoring of the state of the normal symbol, if the above-mentioned normal symbol status is other than 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled. During the normal symbol control process, the value of the normal symbol status takes 1 to 4, and the control module corresponding to each normal symbol status 1 to 4 is executed. Then, the normal symbol status 1 is changing the normal symbol, the normal symbol status 2 is displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the normal symbol status 3 is operating the normal electric auditors object, the normal symbol status 4 is the normal electric auditors operation ending demonstration. It corresponds. Among the sub-module processes distributed when the process is under control in this process, for example, in the normal symbol changing process, the timer value for controlling the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol is updated.
<<Ordinary symbol fluctuation start monitoring process>>

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55), the operating state of the ordinary symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation of the ordinary symbol is started, the normal symbol operation holding ball number is updated, the hit determination, the stop symbol is determined, Usually set the fluctuation of the symbol. In the monitoring of the operating state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal symbol status is 0, which indicates that the normal symbol fluctuation is waiting, and if the value of the normal symbol operation holding ball number is other than 0, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started. It is decided to make it. In updating the number of normal symbol operation holding sphere, the content of the number of normal symbol operation holding sphere is -1. In the hit determination, the determination of the stop symbol, a normal symbol hit determination process is executed. In the variation setting of the ordinary symbol, after setting the ordinary symbol variation pattern number and the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the state of the ordinary symbol is set and the hit determination is performed, and the RWM used for the variation pattern determination is cleared.

In the setting of the normal symbol variation pattern number, the probability variation function inspection process is executed, and as a result of the execution, the byte probability acquisition process is executed using the acquired normal probability variation operation data and the address of the normal symbol variation control table as arguments. As a result of the execution, the 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed using the address calculated by adding the acquired base address and the acquired 1-byte data and the value of the normal symbol variation pattern determination area as arguments. As a result of the execution, the acquired selection number is taken as the normal symbol variation pattern number. In the setting of the variation time of the normal symbol, the 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed with the value obtained by using the normal symbol variation time table address as a reference (minus -2) and the normal symbol variation pattern number as arguments. As a result of execution, the acquired 2-byte data is normally stored in the symbol timer. Normal symbol state setting and hit judgment, in clearing the RWM used to determine the variation pattern, in order to make the state of the ordinary symbol normally during the symbol variation, data storage processing is performed using the address of the ordinary symbol variation state setting table as an argument. Execute. Also, the normal symbol hit determination area used for hit determination and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area used for determining the variation pattern are cleared to 0.
<<Starting port monitoring control process>>

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S56), the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 62) and the starting opening 2 (second starting winning opening 63) of the game ball are monitored. For both the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, the starting port monitoring process is executed using the corresponding monitoring table (the starting port 1 monitoring table or the starting port 2 monitoring table shown in FIG. 27). Regarding the (starting opening for the ordinary electric accessory in this embodiment), the value of the starting opening 2 effective period flag is inspected, and as a result of the inspection, the value of the starting opening 2 effective period flag is predetermined opening opening 2 effective period data. If it is, the starting port monitoring process is executed. The details of the starting port monitoring control process (S56) and the starting port monitoring process will be described later.
<<Special symbol control processing>>

In the special symbol control process (S57), the state of waiting for a hit is inspected, and when it is determined that the state is waiting for a hit, the special symbol display device 1 (first special symbol display unit 70) or the special symbol display device 2 (second 2 The special symbol display unit 71) is executed. In the examination of the hit waiting state, when the value of the special electric game status (described later) is 0, it is determined that the hit waiting state, that is, the special game is not being executed. In the process relating to the special symbol display device 1 or the special symbol display device 2, the value of the special symbol 2 game status is inspected in order to perform either the process relating to the special symbol display device 1 or the special symbol display device 2. As a result of the inspection, when it is 0, it is determined that the process relating to the special symbol display device 1 is performed, and when it is other than 0, it is determined that the process relating to the special symbol display device 2 is performed. In each of the process related to the special symbol display device 1 and the process related to the special symbol display device 2, the address and the special symbol control table of the corresponding special symbol game status (special symbol 1 game status or special symbol 2 game status) The special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed using the address of (special figure 1 control table or special figure 2 control table) as an argument. The special symbol control general-purpose process is a process for allocating to the sub-modules according to the status similarly to the above-mentioned normal symbol control process, but different in that the special symbol is controlled and the two symbols of both the special symbols 1 and 2 are handled. .. By the special symbol control general-purpose process and its sub-module process, the control related to the lighting of the special symbol display device from the change of the special symbol to the stop is performed.
<<Special electric accessory control processing>>

In the special electric auditors product control processing (S58), in order to carry out the processing relating to the special game, the operating condition of the condition device and the special electric auditors product is inspected, and it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric auditors product is operating. If so, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. In the inspection of the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors product, if the value of the special electric game status is other than 0, it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric auditors product is operating. When the condition device is operating or the special electric auditors product is operating, the value of the special electric game status is 1 to 8, and the corresponding control module is executed in each special electric game status 1 to 8. And the special electric game status 1 is preparing to open the special winning opening, the special electric game status 2 is operating the special electric auditors, the special electric game status 3 is closing the big winning opening, the special electric game status 4 is a big hit end demonstration, the special electric game status 5 corresponds to a small hit start demonstration, special electric game status 6 is operating the small hit special electric, special electric game status 7 is closing the small hit big winning opening, special electric game status 8 corresponds to the small hit end demonstration.
<<Successful prize opening period setting process>>

In the special winning opening valid period setting process (S59), a value corresponding to the value of the special winning opening valid period buffer is stored in the special winning opening valid period flag. For example, when the value of the special winning opening valid period buffer is 0, the special winning opening invalid period data is stored in the special winning opening valid period flag, and when the value of the special winning opening valid period buffer is other than 0, the special winning opening valid The period data is stored in the special winning opening valid period flag. In the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92 are provided as the special winning openings, but the same control processing can be applied to both.
<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing>>

In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60), the fluctuation start of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) and the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) is monitored. In both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the address of the special figure game status (special figure 1 game status or special figure 2 game status) and the special figure variation start monitoring table (special figure 1 variation start monitoring shown in FIG. 27. The special symbol variation start monitoring process is executed with the address of the table or the special figure 2 variation start monitoring table) as an argument. The details of this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) will be described later.
<<Abnormality detection processing>>

In the abnormality detection process (S61), magnetic field monitoring, disconnection/short circuit/power source monitoring, radio wave monitoring, open/closed state monitoring of the glass frame set/game board frame/back set (here, set base 31), etc. In order to do so, an error judgment value is created based on the inputs from various sensors. After that, the inspection of the error state, the storage of the error state, and the display request of the error state effect of the gaming machine to the effect control board (here, the sub main board 301) are sequentially performed. In addition, when it is determined that the error state does not change in the inspection of the error state, the storage of the error state and the display request of the error state effect of the gaming machine to the effect control board are not performed.

In creating the error determination value, in order to create the error determination value, the magnetic detection signal inspection, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal inspection, the radio wave detection signal inspection, and the open signal inspection are performed in order. However, the inspection data used for these inspections is a value obtained by ANDing the result of the exclusive OR of the value of the received signal level and the value of the error flag with the communication abnormality mask data. In the error state inspection, since the error state is inspected, the error flag comparison value and the error flag value are compared, and if they match, it is determined that there is no change in the error state. The error flag comparison value is a value that reflects bit 0 of the communication line abnormality determination value in bit 0 of the error determination value created in the creation of the error determination value. In storing the error state, the error flag comparison value created in the inspection of the error state is stored in the error flag. In the display request of the error state effect of the game machine to the effect control board, the command request setting process is executed with the MODE (error A) data and the error flag comparison value created in the inspection of the error state as arguments.
<<Processing to detect abnormalities in passing time>>

In the ball passing time abnormality detection process (S62), in order to detect the ball passing time abnormality, the continuous ON time of each switch (each winning detection device) level is monitored, and as a result of the monitoring, the change from the previous time is detected. If it is determined that there is a ball passing time abnormality setting, command transmission request, and security output request output to the external terminal are created in order. However, if the continuous on-time of each switch level is monitored and it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request to be output to the external terminal is not created.

When monitoring the continuous on-time of each switch level, in order to monitor the continuous on-time of each switch level, the content indicated by the address of the continuous switch table is the number of inspections, and the number of inspections is equal to the winning port or operation on the game board. The switch bit data of the sensor provided in the mouth is sequentially acquired. By acquiring the timer address corresponding to each acquired switch bit data and measuring the on time of the switch level, if it is determined that the continuous on time is abnormal, it is possible to identify which switch is abnormal on the production control board. The EVENT data stored at the address corresponding to the switch bit data is acquired. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, EVENT (error B0) data (00H) is set. It should be noted that if the acquired EVENT data and the value of the entry time abnormal flag (described later) are different, it is determined that there has been a change from the previous time. In setting the abnormal ball passing time, the EVENT data is stored in the abnormal ball passing time flag. In the command transmission request, the command request setting process is executed with MODE (error B) data (9EH) and EVENT data as arguments. In creating a security output request to be output to an external terminal, a signal output request process is executed with the address of the abnormality sensor detection timer + 1 as an argument.
<<Game status display processing>>

In the game state display processing (S63), the number of times the special electric auditors continuously operate, the error state, the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol display device, and the display request of the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol display device are requested. In order to do, the display data creation of the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously, the creation of the display data of the error state, the creation of the display data of the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol display device, and the operation holding ball of the special symbol display device Create number display data. It should be noted that the "creation of display data" here is more specifically a process of storing a table offset value in each RWM work area for generating the display data in an LED output process (S65) described later. Represents. Then, in the game state display process (S63), the process of confirming the value of the predetermined timer and switching the lighting pattern is executed.
<<Handle state signal inspection process>>

In the handle state signal inspection process (S64), since the touch state of the firing handle 20 is monitored, the handle state is inspected, and when it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is decremented. , Update the steering wheel state, set the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and send a command transmission request for steering wheel state effect. When it is determined that the steering wheel state has not changed as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. In addition, in the subtraction of the handle state monitoring timer, when it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted, the subsequent process regarding the handle state is not performed.

In the inspection of the steering wheel state, the value of the reception signal level and the value of the steering wheel state flag are inspected in order to inspect the steering wheel state. When the bit indicating the value of the received signal level is 0 and the value of the handle state flag is 00H, it is determined that the handle state has not changed, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, it is determined that the handle state has changed. To do. When the bit indicating the value of the received signal level is 1 and the value of the handle state flag is 00H, it is determined that the handle state has changed, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, it is determined that the handle state has not changed. To do.

In the subtraction of the handle state monitoring timer, the handle state monitoring timer is decremented, so the content of the handle state monitoring timer is decremented by one. If the result of the subtraction is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted. In updating the handle state, a value corresponding to the value of the handle state flag is stored in the handle state flag in order to update the handle state. When the value of the handle state flag is 00H, the value stored in the handle state flag is 01H, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, the value stored in the handle state flag is 00H.

When setting the handle state monitoring timer, the handle state monitoring timer is set, so that the handle state monitoring time is stored in the handle state monitoring timer. In the command transmission request for the steering wheel state effect, since the command transmission request for the steering wheel state effect is made, the result of logical product of MODE (handle state information) data and 7FH which is a predetermined value, and the lower address of the steering wheel state flag Execute the command request setting process using as an argument.
<<LED output processing>>

In the LED output process (S65), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device, the display of the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol display device, the display of the game state, the special electric In order to display the number of times the accessory operates continuously, display the operating state of the special electric auditors' equipment when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, separate display (right-handed or left-handed), and error display , Display initialization, and display data output are sequentially performed.

To summarize the contents of this LED output processing (S65), in the above-described display initialization, clear data is output to the segment output port in order to initialize the display. Further, in the above-mentioned display data output, in order to output the display data, after the digit corresponding to the data to be displayed is output, the data of the LED segment to be displayed is output.
<<Launch control signal output process>>

In the firing control signal output process (S66), in order to output the prohibition/permission signal of the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition/permission of the launch corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 103 and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, and After obtaining the output data of the firing prohibition/permission, the signal of the firing prohibition/permission is output. When setting the emission prohibition/permission setting and the emission prohibition/permission output data corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 103 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, a flag reflecting the bit setting request is created, and the output data is output. To get

When creating a flag that reflects a bit setting request, if the communication error bit of the error flag or the disconnection short-circuit power supply error bit of the error flag is on, reflect to the flag that there is a bit clear request, otherwise, set the bit request. It is reflected in the flag. To obtain the output data, the bit data setting process is executed with the flag reflecting the bit setting request, the address of the buffer such as the digit, and the firing permission signal bit data as arguments. As a result of execution, the acquired bit data is used as output data. When outputting the firing prohibition/permission signal, the acquired output data is output to an output port such as a digit in order to output the firing prohibition/permission signal.
<<Test signal output processing>>

In the test signal output process (S67), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port. Of the plurality of test signal output ports, the test signal output port 1 outputs a signal indicating that each special symbol is changing, a big hit, a character continuously operating device is operating, and a condition device is operating from each associated terminal. The test signal output port 2 is a normal electric accessory opening extended state, a normal symbol variation time shortened state, a normal symbol high probability state, a special symbol variation time shortened state, a special symbol high probability state from each terminal associated with the signal. Output. The test signal output port 3 outputs the normal electric auditors product operating signal, the normal symbol changing signal, the normal symbol hit signal, and the special electric auditors product operating signal from the associated terminals. In order to create a signal to be output to each test signal output port 1 to 3, output data creation processing is performed using the address of the corresponding test signal data table among the test signal data tables 1 to 3 as an argument.

The test signal output port 5 outputs the signals of the gaming machine error state, the launch position designation, and the symbol data from the associated terminals. In creating a signal to be output to the test signal output port 5, the lower 2 bits of the normal symbol combination number are set as bits 0 and 1 of the symbol data. Also, the error checking process is executed with the test terminal error output mask data as an argument. As a result of the execution, if an error is detected, it is determined that the gaming machine is in error, and an ON state of the gaming machine error state signal is created. In other cases, the gaming machine error status signal is turned off. When the value of the divided state flag is 0, the firing position designation signals 1 to 3 are turned off. In other cases, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on, and the firing position designation signal 2 and the firing position designation signal 3 are turned off. The test signal output port 6 and the test signal output port 7 output signals of symbol data from the associated terminals.
<<Solenoid output processing>>

In the solenoid output process (S68), since the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the special winning opening opening solenoid is output, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is acquired, and the output data of the special winning opening opening solenoid is obtained. , And output the output data. In order to obtain the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the output data of the special winning opening opening solenoid, the solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer are acquired, the output data is acquired, and the solenoid operation timer is updated in order. To do. In outputting the output data, the result of the logical sum of the acquired output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the output data of the special winning opening opening solenoid is output to the solenoid output port.
<<Production control command transmission processing>>

In the production control command transmission process (S69), the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the production control board is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is cleared. The MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data is output, the MODE data is output, the MODE data is held, the EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, and the EVENT data is output. The timing of sending command data is defined by the effect data strobe, and a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) after the ON time (here, 2 μs or more) of the effect data strobe signal is the effect data holding time.

In the command transmission request inspection, the value of the command request writing position (area) and the value of the command request reading position (area) are compared, and if the values do not match, it is determined that there is a command transmission request. When acquiring the command data to request, the double value of the logical product of the address calculation value and the position correction bit data stored at the command request read position is added to the command buffer address, and the result of the addition is the content of the acquired address. Is the command data. After the address calculation value stored in the command request read position is acquired, the command request read position is incremented by 1 to update the contents of the command data read position. In clearing the command buffer, the command buffer in which the acquired command data was stored is cleared to 0 in order to clear the command buffer.

In the acquisition of the MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, the upper command data acquired is used as the MODE data. In the output of the MODE data, after the obtained MODE data is output to the effect command output port, the strobe output process is executed to output the effect data strobe. When holding the MODE data, a wait is performed for a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) for holding the MODE data. In the acquisition of EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, the lower order of the acquired command data is EVENT data. In outputting the EVENT data, after the obtained EVENT data is output to the same effect command output port as that described above, the strobe output process is executed to output the effect data strobe.
<< External information output processing >>

In the external information output process (S70), a signal to be output to the external output terminal of the external relay terminal board 46 is created, and the created signal is output. The configuration of the external information output port includes external information 1 to external information 6 and security, and the remaining one bit is unused. In creating the external information 1 and the external information 3 to 6, the output data creation process is executed using the address of the external information data table as an argument. If the value of the hit flag is the special figure 1 small hit data, and the probability variation function inspection process is executed, and as a result of the execution, if the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device is not activated, the external information 3 bit is turned on. create.

In creating the external information 2, in order to create the external information 2, a predetermined bit of the starting mouth information timer is inspected, and as a result of the inspection, the external information is adjusted in accordance with ON/OFF of the predetermined bit of the starting mouth information timer. Create 2 on/off. In creating security, the error checking process is executed with the external information error output mask data as an argument. If an error is detected as a result of execution, the security bit of output data is turned on. Otherwise, create security bit off for output data. In outputting the created signal, the created external information 1 to external information 6 and security are output to the external information output port.
<Interrupt on main board>

Next, an interrupt on the main board 102 will be described. Maskable interrupts and non-maskable interrupts are performed on the main board 102, and the maskable interrupts are caused by PT0I. The maskable interrupt by PT0I realizes an interrupt period of 4 ms by dividing the system clock, and executes the above-mentioned game progress interrupt process (PTC0 interrupt process) in this interrupt period.

On the other hand, the non-maskable interrupt occurs when the main board 102 detects a power failure and outputs a power failure signal, and the power failure signal is input to a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) not shown.

The game progress interrupt processing is monitored by the interrupt processing time monitoring means, and this interrupt processing time monitoring means can be initialized and restarted within the timeout time set in the function setting of the program management area of the CPU 501. If not, a timeout occurs and a user reset occurs. Then, the core of the CPU 501 is reset and the control start process is executed. The restart of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is executed when the recursion information is set and the built-in timer is initialized during the circulation processing within the control start processing and during the game progress interrupt processing.
<Random number on main board>

Next, random numbers used in the main board 102 will be described. The random number in this embodiment is divided into a random number related to operation of the accessory and another random number used for the game. Random numbers related to the work of the accessory, normal random number per symbol, normal random number per symbol, random number per special symbol, special random symbol per soft random number, special symbol per soft initial value random number, special symbol per symbol random symbol, and special symbol per symbol There are seven types of symbol initial value random numbers.

The random number per ordinary symbol is a random number used in the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device. The value of the random number is “0 to 282”, and the size of the random number is 283. Update method, first add 1 to the previous random number, if the result of addition exceeds the maximum value, return to 0, if the random number makes one round, the value of the initial random number per normal symbol at that time is the normal symbol The value is a random number. The update timing is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition timing is when the passage of the game ball is detected by the left passage detecting device 69a of the left operating port 68a or the right passage detecting device 69b of the right operating port 68b. The number of random number values to be won differs depending on whether the probability is low or high, and is 11 when the probability is low and 282 when the probability is high.

Normal initial value per symbol random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the normal random number per symbol, and the end value of the normal random number per symbol. The value of the random number is “0 to 282”, and the size of the random number is 283. The updating method is such that first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is every game progress interrupt, and is updated even while the game progress interrupt is not executed.

The random number per special symbol is a random number used in the lottery of the special symbol display device (70, 71) by acquiring the random number (hardware random number) generated by the ch (channel) A of the random number circuit of the CPU 501 by software. .. The value of the random number is "0 to 065535", and the size of the random number is 65536. The update method is to update once every two clocks of the crystal oscillator input to the RCK (random number clock) terminal of the CPU 501. The start value of the random number is a value based on the ID number of the CPU 501, and is changed each time the system is reset when the power is turned on (or off). The method of changing the random number sequence is to automatically update the random number sequence every time the random number sequence makes one round. The update timing is the timing set by the clock divided by two of the clock input to the RCK terminal.

The acquisition timing differs depending on whether the starting winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detection device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63 is detected. In the case of the start winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62, a low level is input to the P0 terminal of the CPU 501 when the input signal is turned from OFF to ON, and a random number value (hardware The random number value of the random number is stored in the random number register (RA0D). The software acquires the built-in random number (hardware random number) stored in the random number register (RA0D) when it is determined that the input signal of the start winning detection device 74 of the first start winning opening 62 is turned from OFF to ON. The random number per special symbol is a value obtained by adding a soft random number per special symbol to the acquired internal random number.

On the other hand, in the case of the start winning detection device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63, when the input signal is turned from OFF to ON, a low level is input to the P1 terminal of the CPU 501 and the disturbance taken from the channel A of the random number circuit. The numerical value is stored in the random number register (RA1D), which is different from the case of the starting winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62.

Regarding the random number per special symbol, the number of values of the random number that will be won is when displaying the combination of symbols that the condition device operates, that is, when it is a big hit and the condition device does not operate, and This is different when displaying a combination of symbols that causes the special electric accessory to operate, that is, when a small hit occurs. The number of random number values that will be awarded to the jackpot is different between the low probability and the high probability, and is 164 in the low probability and 1640 in the high probability.

On the other hand, the number of values of the random numbers that will win the small hit is different between the first special symbol display portion 70 and the second special symbol display portion 71, and the first special symbol display portion 70 is 656 pieces, the second. There are 105 special symbol display portions 71.

Also, regarding the random number per special symbol, the size of the random number is 65536, and is updated at a speed of one cycle at about 0.013 s (seconds).

The special symbol-based soft random number is a random number used for lottery of the special symbol display device (70, 71), and is added to the acquired internal random number when the internal random number generated by chA of the random number circuit is acquired as described above. .. The value of the random number is "0 to 65520", and the size of the random number is 65521. Update method, first add 1 to the previous random number, if the added result exceeds the maximum value, return to 0, if the random number makes one round, special value per special symbol at that time The value of the random number is special The value is a soft random number per symbol. The update timing is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the winning award of the game ball is detected by the starting award detecting device 74 of the first starting award winning opening 62 or the starting award detecting device 75 of the second starting award winning opening 63.

Soft initial value random number per special symbol is a random number for determining the initial value of the soft random number per special symbol and the ending value of the soft random number per special symbol, the value of the random number is "0 to 65520", and the size of the random number. It is 65521. The updating method is such that first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is every game progress interrupt, and is updated even while the game progress interrupt is not executed.

The special symbol per symbol random number is a random number used to determine a combination of symbols that is a big hit. The value of the random number is "0 to 999", and the size of the random number is 1000. Update method, first add 1 to the previous random number, if the added result exceeds the maximum value, return to 0, if the random number makes one round, special value per special symbol at that time The value of the random number is special The value is a random number of symbols per symbol. The update timing is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the winning award of the game ball is detected by the starting award detecting device 74 of the first starting award winning opening 62 or the starting award detecting device 75 of the second starting award winning opening 63.

Special symbol per symbol initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the special symbol per symbol random number and the ending value of the special symbol per symbol random number, the value of the random number is "0 to 999", and the size of the random number That is 1000. The updating method is such that first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is every game progress interrupt, and is updated even while the game progress interrupt is not executed.

There are two types of random numbers other than the normal random number variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, which are used for playing games. Of these, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is a random number used for the fluctuation pattern selection of the normal symbol display device, the value of the random number is "0 to 232", and the size of the random number is 233. The updating method is such that first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update timing is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection devices 69a and 69b of the operation ports 68a and 68b.

The variation pattern random number is a random number used for the variation pattern selection of the special symbol display device (70, 71), the value of the random number is "0 to 49999", and the size of the random number is 50,000. In the update method, 3511 is first subtracted from the previous random number, and if the subtracted result is less than 0, 50000 is added to the subtracted result. The update timing is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition timing is when the winning of the game ball is detected by the starting winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detection device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.
<<Power-off processing>>

Next, a power-off process executed when power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the power-off process, data in all used registers are saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable/disable state before power-off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84), The process moves to RWM access prohibition processing (S88). On the other hand, if it has been saved (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information of normal power-off is saved in the RWM (S86), and the checksum of the RWM is calculated. Then, the checksum data is saved (S87). Then, the access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the control process is looped to wait for the reset of the CPU 501.

In addition, in this power-off processing, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are used. The information is set, the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the timekeeping is recurred. Further, in this embodiment, the forced setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and before the saving process (S81) of all the registers to be used. It is being appreciated. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state where the timekeeping for monitoring recurs. In other words, by forcing the monitoring timing to recur when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring timing recurring in the control processing immediately after the power supply is restarted. Has become. <Other individual control processing modes>
<<Control Mode Related to Command Transmission Timing>>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by a command request before transmission. The command buffer is a plurality of buffers functioning as a ring buffer. In the control process for command transmission (here, the production control command transmission process (S69)), the command buffers are stored once in the order in which they are stored in the command buffer. In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. Note that it is also possible to employ a method in which the command having a higher priority is transmitted first. Further, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, the command can be transmitted at any time. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interrupt process, production command transmission is collectively performed within one control processing module such as production control command transmission processing (S69). Instead of this, each time a command needs to be transmitted, the command is sequentially transmitted in each control processing module. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the game progress interrupt process after the next time. Then, for example, a command at the time of starting winning and a command transmission at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol are not delayed, and prompt command processing becomes possible.
<<Control Mode Related to Update of Suspended Storage>>

In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and since the regularity is provided in the execution order of the first and second plurality of games, the pending storage is updated. Are sequentially performed for each of the second game and the first game. Therefore, the update of the information stored on hold is completed by only updating the information stored on hold for each of the second game and the first game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of prioritizing the first game or prioritizing any game, the reserved memory is exhausted in the order in which the start winning occurs and the reserved memory is stored (winning order digestion). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does. Of these, if a configuration is adopted in which the reserved memory is consumed in the order in which the start winnings occur, updating the reserved memory information according to the consumption, updating the total number of reserved games for a plurality of games, and storing the winning order. As a result, the information stored on hold can be updated as a whole.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to notify the sub main board 301 that the pending storage has been updated, a request for the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is made as described above. By including both the symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command in one command, it is possible to reduce the required program and memory capacity.
<<Control mode related to variation pattern lottery>>

Subsequently, various aspects related to the lottery of the variation pattern will be described. As for the mode of determining the variation pattern described here, either one may be selected and applied in one pachinko game machine 10, or may be appropriately used in combination. When a plurality of aspects are used together, it is possible to properly use the aspects, for example, based on factors such as the result of winning or rejecting.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of the variation pattern, as described above, the result of winning, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol) are determined. Although used as an element, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determinants is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time that is paired with the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number. Further, in the present embodiment, with regard to the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a big hit or not. That is, in the case of a big hit, based on the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number, the variation pattern table is selected from among those linked to these. On the other hand, in the case of a deviation, a variation pattern table is selected from among those linked to these based on the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the random number of winning and winning. Among these, in the case of a big hit, for the variation pattern to which the time of re-lottery is given on the production, the time of re-lottery is given based on the production state (whether or not there is a specific production) and the special symbol group. Presence/absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

In addition, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation additional information according to the determined variation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent variation time based on the variation additional information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern effect, it is conceivable that the extension of the variation time corresponding thereto is determined ex post facto.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the variation determined in advance in relation to the game state or the winning symbol on the sub-main board 301. The effect of adding the additional time to the time later can be performed. Then, in such an aspect, when deciding the total variation time of the effect design, it is possible to create various variation patterns while suppressing the number of variation patterns provided in advance as follows. Is. That is, considering the case of giving the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (so-called “pseudo continuous”), when the pseudo continuous variation patterns are simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. I need to put it. Then, in the case where effect patterns such as effect patterns on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the change patterns individually determined by the main board 102, the total number of change patterns on the main board 102 is large. Therefore, it is conceivable that the number will exceed 256, for example. Therefore, in order to give a distinguishable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it becomes necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for representing the code, as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using the variation additional information (variation additional pattern), it is possible to form a variation pattern ex post facto by connecting to the relatively small number of basic variation patterns, for example, variation additional information randomly selected. Is. In this way, a new variation pattern can be formed by combining the variation patterns, so that various variation patterns can be created without increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. It should be noted that the random number value relating to the variation additional information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 as a command for prefetch effect when the start winning occurs. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the variation addition information can be easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. As a further example of using the variation additional information, when "777", which is a probability variation symbol, is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the effect symbols 190, the variation additional information is not set and the effect symbols 190 are combined. , When "666" which is a non-probable variation pattern is once displayed, the effect until the result of whether to promote to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the variation mode) There is also a case where the variable additional information is set and performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of reserved balls as an element, and the referenced fluctuation pattern table differs depending on how many reserved balls are. The fluctuation pattern table is provided in correspondence with the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why not only the four hold patterns 0 to 3 but also the variation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started when the number of reserved balls is four, and the number of reserved balls is three. A state in which the number of holding balls is 3 at a stage where the control process in the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time has not yet reached the determination of the variation pattern which is the process in the subsequent game progress interrupt process. When a new starting prize is generated, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the variation pattern is determined. Therefore, the variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can be an element for determining the variation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, in the control process, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the start winning is not added from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the variation pattern. It should be noted that any of the aspects can be applied to a pachinko game machine of a type in which a maximum holding number other than 4 (for example, 8) is set.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number may be acquired at the fluctuation pattern lottery time. That is, since the variation pattern random number is not a random number related to operation of a special electric auditor or other accessory product, as an element for performing an appropriate game, compared to a random number or the like, for example, in aiming for a fair game. The need for restrictions is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variation pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of winning the start, and for example, the variation pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variation pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of information to be stored at the time of starting winning, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program and the memory.
<<Control Mode for Designation of Design>>

In the lottery of symbols, determine the symbol determination table to be used based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then determine the symbol from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number, etc. Is also possible. In the present embodiment, the numerical range of symbol random numbers is set to "0 to 999", so the binary code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of shortening times is distributed to the winning symbols (may be a group of symbols), and the number of rounds and the number of shortening times thereafter and the opening time of the special winning opening are determined according to the winning symbol. Alternatively, the opening pattern or the like may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store the data unique to the game state and control processing, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Furthermore, in the command (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in the present embodiment) that conveys a symbol or the like from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301, information that conveys the game state (game state designation information) ) Can be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting a predetermined timing.
<<Relationship between variation time of special design and production design>>

As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop changing in synchronization with each other. Depending on the variation time of the effect symbol 190, the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) can be shortened to some extent.

That is, the variation of the special symbol and the variation pattern are determined, and when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation start command of the effect symbol (command at the time of variation start) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required for transmitting and receiving a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the commands at the start of fluctuation) and the command buffer (the ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) are set and waiting. Influenced by the time until all the existing commands (first-in command) are sent out, it is conceivable that the variation start of the effect symbol will be delayed by that amount than the variation start of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, a fluctuation stop command (a command when the symbol of the special symbol is fixed) is transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the time of starting the fluctuation when the symbol is fixed). It is possible that the stop of the variation of the effect design is delayed due to the time required for the transmission and reception of) and the congestion of the command buffer (the degree of the number of commands waiting for transmission).

In this way, the variation time of the effect symbol is set to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the variation, and by performing the swing variation, the special symbol starts the next variation. I try to avoid the situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later. Although there is a possibility that the display during shaking fluctuation may be extended to the next fluctuation due to the processing delay due to the number of commands, the amount of delay is small because the number of commands transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 is smaller at the end of fluctuation than at the start of fluctuation. Is suppressed, it is possible to fix the effect symbol almost certainly during the display fixing time of the special symbol.
<Control mode related to various advance notice commands at the time of winning the start prize>

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 10 in the present embodiment uses the main board 102 as the advance information notification information when the gaming ball wins the starting opening (the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63). From the sub-main substrate 301, various notice commands such as a symbol notice (winning symbol notice effect), a variation notice (pattern notice effect), and a hit notice (hit notice effect) command are transmitted. These advance notice commands are transmitted as a part of the above-mentioned command at the time of starting winning, and on the sub-main board 301 side, various advance notice effects as described above are used by using these advance notice commands. Is feasible. In the following, the features of various advance notice commands in the present embodiment and the control processing relating to the transmission of the advance notice commands will be described more specifically.
<<Preliminary judgment of winning/losing lottery results>>

First, a determination mode of the winning/winning lottery result based on the random number acquired at the time of starting winning will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the win/loss random value range in the first lottery and the second lottery is “0 to 65535” (see FIG. 8A), and this win/loss random number range “0 to 65535”. Is divided into multiple random value ranges. Then, as shown in FIG. 8A, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number range of “0 to 63238” and the random number value of “65535” are “out of sync”. A lottery result is assigned. Further, the random number range “63239 to 63402” is assigned with “normal time probability varying big jackpot”, and the random number range “63403 to 64878” is assigned with “probability varying big jackpot”.

Further, in the random number range “64879 to 65429”, “small hit” is assigned to the first lottery, and “defeat” is assigned to the second lottery. Further, "small hit" is assigned to the random number range "65430-65534" in both the first lottery and the second lottery. That is, in the random number range of “64879 to 65534”, “small hit” is assigned to the special figure 1, and “small hit or out” is assigned to the special figure 2.

In addition, as described above, a group of consecutive numerical values is formed for each lottery result in the numerical range of the winning/discarding random numbers. The group having the random number value range of "0 to 63238" is the "outside" group on the lower limit side, and the numerical range related to this group may be referred to as "numerical range a" below. Further, a group having a random number value range of "63239 to 63402" is a "normal time probability variable time big hit" group, and the numerical range related to this group may be referred to as "numerical range b" below. Further, the group whose random number value range is "63403 to 64878" is a "probable variation big hit" group, and the numerical range related to this group may be referred to as "numerical range c" below.

Further, a group having a random number value range of “64879 to 65534” is a “small hit” group, and the numerical range related to this group may be referred to as “numerical range d” below. Further, "65535" is a "off" group on the upper limit side, and the numerical range related to this group may be referred to as "numerical range e" below. In addition, in the present embodiment, only one value of “65535” belongs to the “off” group on the upper limit side, but a range made up of a plurality of numerical values such as “65534 to 65535” is set on the upper limit side. It may be an “outside” group.

It is possible to determine the result of the winning/losing lottery, for example, as in the following procedure (1) to procedure (4) using the winning/discarding random value range grouped in this way. That is, first, as a procedure (1), a random number value is acquired, and then as a procedure (2), the upper limit value of the hit range is subtracted from the acquired random number value. Further, as a procedure (3), the lower limit value of the hit range is subtracted from the random number value obtained in the procedure (1).

Then, as the procedure (4), the relationship of (value as the subtraction result of the procedure (2))<0 (≦0 when the upper limit value is included) is established, and (the result of the procedure (3) is obtained. If (value)>0 (≧0 if the lower limit value is included), it is determined that the random number value acquired in (1) above is one of the random number values included in the random number value range b of the first big hit. be able to.

For example, in the case of the probability variation, in the above procedure (2), the upper limit value of the big hit range is “64878”, and this value is subtracted from the acquired value of the random number. Further, in the above-mentioned procedure (3), “63239” is subtracted, and in the procedure (4), the condition (first condition) as to whether the calculation result of the procedure (2) is 0 or less is determined. Furthermore, if the first condition is satisfied, the lottery result may still be a big hit, and therefore the condition (second condition) as to whether the operation result of the procedure (3) is 0 or more is determined. .. Then, if the second condition is satisfied, the random number value for which the acquired value is a big hit belongs to the range, and thus the big hit is determined.

Note that the procedure is not limited to such a procedure. For example, the calculation of the procedure (2) and the procedure (3) described above may be exchanged, and the lower limit value of the hit range may be subtracted in the procedure (2). It is also possible to subtract the upper limit of the hit range with ).

Further, the result of the lottery can be determined not only when confirming the range but also when the winning/winning lottery is performed by, for example, an addition formula or a subtraction formula. Here, in the addition-type lottery result confirmation, a predetermined value that is predetermined for each lottery result is added to the acquired random number value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value of the random number range, the lottery result concerned It is determined that you have been won. On the other hand, in the subtraction-type lottery result confirmation, a predetermined value that is determined in advance for each lottery result is subtracted from the obtained random number value, and if the subtraction result (difference) falls below the lower limit value of the random number value range, It is determined that the lottery result has been won. Then, according to these addition-type or subtraction-type determination methods, the determination can be performed with a smaller number of control processing times than in the case of performing range confirmation.

As described above, by performing the prior winning/non-winning determination associated with the starting winning, the above-mentioned command at the time of winning winning is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 with the content based on the result of the winning/winning lottery. You can Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit announcement effect as a look-ahead effect in association with the hit/miss determination result without waiting for the hold to be exhausted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pre-determination of the type of the special symbol and the pre-determination of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol, as in the case of the result of the above-mentioned winning/winning lottery, the determination based on the random value range is performed. It is supposed to be done. Further, the types of special symbols and the types of variation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in a larger number than the types of the result of the winning/winning lottery, and the number of groups is also larger than in the case of the winning/winning lottery. However, as a pre-determination method based on the random number value range, it is possible to perform the same as the pre-determination related to the above-mentioned win/fail judgment, although the random number range and the type of the lottery result to be grouped are different. .. Therefore, here, the detailed description of the preliminary judgment based on the random number value range regarding the symbol notice effect and the pattern notice effect will be omitted.

By performing the preliminary determination based on such a range of random number values, it is possible to round the information, and it is possible to create a command related to the preliminary determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random number values exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random number value exceeds 1 byte. Therefore, if the information of the random number value is transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 as it is (as raw information) for the preliminary determination, the information for identifying which random number is transmitted is transmitted by MODE, and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT) stored in EVENT must be transmitted twice in order to notify the random number value.

However, as in the present embodiment, by converting the acquired random number value into information indicating the range to which the random number value belongs and transmitting the information to the sub-main substrate 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced below the number of random number values, and the random Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), the attribute of the acquired random number value can be converted into a command with the information amount of 1 byte.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing for the preliminary determination as described above is performed by using the selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 23) and the like, but details of the selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 22) and the like are described. Will be described later.
<Specific modes of various advance notice commands at the time of winning the start prize>

Next, among the various commands at the time of winning the start prize described above, various more specific modes of various notification commands such as a winning notification (hit notification effect) command will be described. In the following, the winning notice command will be referred to as a "hit notice effect command", the symbol notice command will be referred to as a "hit symbol notice effect command", and the variation notice command will be referred to as a "pattern notice effect command".
<Hit notice production command>

In the above-mentioned hit announcement production command, whether the winning/random number obtained when the game ball wins the starting opening (the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63) corresponds to the winning, This is a command for notifying the sub-main board 301 (see FIG. 4) of advance notice information (advance notice information) regarding whether or not it is applicable.

In the present embodiment, the hit announcement effect command is composed of a combination of a MODE command (D0H) and an EVENT command (00H to 04H), as shown in the upper part of FIG. 16(a). As shown in the figure, five types of hit announcement effect commands 0 to 4 are assigned to 00H to 04H which are EVENT commands of the hit announcement effect command. Then, in the present embodiment, the notice effect of the departure is assigned to the EVENT command of 0 (00H).

In addition, the 1 (01H) EVENT command is a big hit regardless of whether the probability of winning/winning lottery is low (normal probability) or high probability. The notice effect is assigned, and the 2(02H) EVENT command is assigned the notice effect for the probability variation big jackpot (see FIG. 8A), which is a big hit only when the probability of winning/winning lottery is high. ing. Further, to the 3 (03H) EVENT command, a small hit advance notice effect is assigned to the special figure 1, and a small hit or deviant notice effect is assigned to the special figure 2. Further, the advance notice effect of the departure is assigned to the 4 (04H) EVENT command.

On the side of the sub-main board 301 that has received the hit announcement effect command, whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a big hit, a small hit, or neither a big hit nor a small hit, based on the content of the announcement effect command. It is possible to distinguish whether it is out.

In the present embodiment, the EVENT commands 00H and 04H are omitted. However, the random number range 0 to 63238 (see FIG. 8A) corresponding to 00H is divided into two, and the same deviation range is determined at the time of the success/failure determination. Also, the command transmitted to the sub-main board 301 may be divided into a plurality of commands. By doing so, it is possible to have a plurality of winning notice information for the deviation, and the sub-main side distinguishes whether or not it is the hold for the prefetching notification object among the random numbers corresponding to the deviation. You can also do it. As such a control mode, for example, the EVENT command 00H is assigned to the random numbers 0 to 60000, the EVENT command 00H is assigned to the random numbers 60001 to 63238, and the prefetch lottery is selected when the EVENT command is 01H, and the prefetch lottery is selected when the EVENT command is 00H. Can be exemplified.
<Winning notice notice production command>

Next, the above-mentioned winning symbol notice effect command will be described. This winning symbol notice production command is, for the sub-main board 301, notice information (advance notice information) relating to the range to which the symbol random number belongs when determining the type of symbol (special symbol to be stopped) from the symbol random number. ) Is given. Further, since the winning symbol notice effect command uses different determination tables in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, as will be described later, the special figure 1 is classified into 12 kinds of values, and the special figure 2 Are classified into nine types of values, but different content information is transmitted depending on whether the result of the winning/winning lottery is off or in the case of a big hit. In the following, the winning symbol notice effect command may be simply referred to as “symbol notice effect command”.
<<Symbol notice notice production command related to loss>>

In this embodiment, the winning symbol notice effect command is a MODE command (D1H) and an EVENT command (00H to 0BH or 00H to 08H) as shown in the "off" column in the middle part of FIG. 16A. It is configured by a combination of. As to the special figure 1, as shown in the figure, 12 types of winning symbol notice effect commands 0 to 11 are assigned to the EVENT command of 00H to 0BH, and for special figure 2, the winning symbol notice effect command. Nine types 0 to 8 are assigned to the EVENT command from 00H to 08H.

Then, with regard to the result of lottery of the outlier according to Toku-zu 1, the symbol advance notice effect command of “first out” is assigned to the EVENT command of 0 (00H) to 10 (09H). In addition, regarding the result of lottery of the special figure 1 similarly, the EVENT command of 11 (0AH) is assigned the symbol notice effect command of “second deviation” which is a different kind of deviation from “first deviation”. ing.

The above-mentioned "first deviation" command and "second deviation" command are both notified to the sub-main board 301 when the result of the winning/winning lottery is a failure. Then, in the present embodiment, with respect to the symbol notice effect command of the special figure 1, if the result of the winning/winning lottery is out, either "first out" or "second out" based on the value of the acquired symbol random number. That command is selected.

In this way, by dividing the symbol notice effect command relating to the detachment into a plurality of types, it is possible to perform the look-ahead effect of different tendencies on the side of the sub-main board 301 based on the difference in the type of the symbol command relating to the detachment. Become. Then, it becomes easy to diversify the look-ahead effect related to the deviation, and it is possible to increase the variety of the look-ahead effect.

Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the “first deviation” command is widely used to represent general deviation. On the other hand, the “second deviation” command is used as a deviation that is narrower than the “first deviation” command. More specifically, the “first out” command is associated with all outs, without distinguishing the mode of outs. On the other hand, the “second out” command is used as a suggestion that there may be an effect that develops into a super reach when the corresponding special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, as for the special figure 2, since the second deviation is not included, the “second deviation” command is not assigned, and the “first deviation” is assigned to all nine types of EVENT commands. .. For this reason, with regard to Toku-zu 2, a command indicating a general deviation is transmitted without distinguishing the type of EVENT command.
<<Banning design notice production command related to big hit>>

When the result of the winning/winning lottery is a big hit, the above-mentioned winning symbol notice effect command notifies the side of the sub-main board 301 of the kind of big hit. In this embodiment, as described above, the 16R probability variation, the 4R probability variation, and the 4R normal big hit are provided (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). In addition, in FIGS. 9A and 9B and the description using these, the description is given assuming that there are only 10 types of special symbols “0” to “9” so that the description and the illustration are not complicated. went.

In this embodiment, five types of "16R probability variation 1" to "16R probability variation 5" are provided as symbol notice effects corresponding to the 16R probability variation special symbols "7" and "5". Further, as the symbol notice effect corresponding to the special symbols “3” and “1” which are the above-mentioned 4R certainty variations, four types of “4R certainty variation 1” to “4R certainty variation 4” are provided, and the above-mentioned 4R normal variation is provided. Six types of "4R normal 1" to "4R normal 6" are provided as symbol notice effects corresponding to certain special symbols "0" and "2". Then, when the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display portion (70) or the second special symbol display portion (71) described above, in the display pattern according to the kind of the big hit, the special The symbols are displayed.

In the “big hit” column in the middle of FIG. 16A, the left side shows the relationship between the big hit type and the command according to Toku-zu 1, and the right side is the big hit type and the command according to Toku-zu 2. Shows the relationship with. Among these, for Special Figure 1, the EVENT command of 0 (00H) to 4 (04H) has "16R probability variation 1", "16R probability variation 2", "16R probability variation 3", "16R probability variation 4", "16R probability variation 1". Five symbol notice effects of "probability variation 5" are assigned respectively. In addition, regarding Special Figure 1, the EVENT command of 5 (05H) to 7 (07H) includes "4R probability variation 1", "4R probability variation 2", and "4R probability variation 4" among the various 4R probability variations described above. Three symbol notice effects are assigned respectively.

Further, regarding the special figure 1, similarly, in the EVENT command of 8 (08H) and 9 (0BH), two symbol notice effects of "4R normal 1" and "4R normal 2" out of the various 4R normals described above are provided. , And the EVENT commands of 10 (0AH) and 11 (0BH) are all assigned with the symbol advance notice effect of "4R normal 3".

Furthermore, for the special figure 2, the EVENT command of 0 (00H) to 3 (03H) has four symbols of "16R probability variation 1", "16R probability variation 2", "16R probability variation 3", and "16R probability variation 4". Notice productions are assigned respectively. Similarly, with regard to special figure 2, two symbol notice effects “4R probability variation 1” and “4R probability variation 3” are assigned to the EVENT commands of 4 (04H) and 5 (05H), respectively. Then, to the EVENT command of 6 (06H) to 8 (08H), three symbol notice effects of "4R normal 4", "4R normal 5", and "4R normal 6" are respectively assigned.
<Pattern notice production command>

Next, the above-mentioned pattern notice effect command will be described. This pattern notice production command gives the sub-main board 301 notice information (advance notice information) relating to the above-mentioned variation pattern random number (special figure variation pattern random number) acquired at the time of winning the start prize. Furthermore, this pattern notice production command is a command for informing the sub-main substrate 301 of what numerical range the variation pattern random number acquired when a game ball wins the starting opening is included. ..

In this embodiment, the pattern notice effect command is composed of a combination of a MODE command (D2H) and an EVENT command starting from 00H, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 16(a). Here, as described above, the effect patterns notified to the sub-main board 301 side by the pattern notice effect command are various depending on the various lottery results and the difference in the game state. Therefore, in FIG. 16A, the EVENT command of the pattern notice effect command is described as "00H-??H", and the pattern notice effect is described as "Pattern notice effect 0-?".
<Commonization of hit design notice production commands related to outliers and big hits>

Next, the characteristic use of the above-mentioned winning symbol notice effect command will be described. As described above, the symbol notice effect command relating to the disengagement is provided with two types of "first disengagement" and "second dismissal". Of these, the "second dismissal" command is for the corresponding special symbol. It is a suggestion that the production will develop into super reach during variable display.

Then, the symbol notice production command uses a common judgment value table regardless of whether it is right or wrong (see "Hit symbol notice judgment value table 1" in FIG. 31), and the value of the EVENT command of "second deviation" is 11 ( 0BH), and this value is the same as the EVENT command (0BH) representing a part of “4R normal” in “4R normal”, which is one of the types of big hits, and has the same value. .. Therefore, the symbol notice production command as the advance notice information from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 has a common "2nd hit" which is a specific miss, and "4R normal 3" which is a specific jackpot. EVENT command to notify.

Therefore, in the main board 102, advance notice information (preliminary information) corresponding to a winning or super reach effect can be notified to the sub-main board 301 side only by the winning design notice effect command, and the processing in the main board 102 is performed. The burden can be reduced.

Here, the above-mentioned “super reach or higher” means that the rank relating to the degree of expectation of a big hit is super reach or higher. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect patterns are roughly classified into three types, "no reach", "normal reach", and "super reach". Of these, "normal reach" is a production pattern having a higher rank in relation to the expectation of a big hit than "no reach". Furthermore, "super reach" is a production pattern having a higher rank in relation to the expectation of a big hit than "normal reach". Therefore, "super reach or higher" does not include "no reach" or "normal reach" that are lower in rank.

Further, as described above, these effect patterns are further subdivided, and among them, the effect patterns grouped into "Super 1", "Super 2", "Super 3", etc. in "Super Reach" as well. Is provided. Then, when the result of the win/no win lottery is a big hit, at the time of the hold digestion, at a rate of almost 100%, one of the “super reach” is performed to proceed to the big hit production. Further, even when the result of the win/no win lottery is out of alignment, an effect pattern that progresses to "super reach" and out of play may be executed.

In the above-mentioned “super reach or above”, when the result of the winning/winning lottery is a big hit, the progress to the big hit production is guaranteed at a rate of 100% (or almost 100%) through the “super reach”. It means that. Further, if the result of the winning/disapproving lottery is out of proportion, it means that the progress to at least the “super reach” is guaranteed at a rate of 100%.

Further, as described above, by sharing the EVENT command related to the “second deviation” and the “4R normal 3”, on the sub-main board 301 side that receives this EVENT command (0BH), a hit announcement effect command or It is possible to perform look-ahead effects related to effect patterns of winning or super reach without confirming the pattern notice effect command. Therefore, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to make a simple determination based on only the symbol notice command to perform the prefetching effect corresponding to the effect of super reach or more.

Further, on the side of the sub-main board 301, as described above, the pre-reading effect can be determined based on only 11 (0BH) as the EVENT command related to the symbol notification command, but it is not limited to this, and the hit notification effect command, By referring to the pattern notice effect command, the look-ahead effect can be determined based on more information. Then, in this case, the number of combinations of information that can be referred to can be increased, and diversification of the prefetching effect is possible, compared to the case where the effect pattern of the prefetching effect is determined based only on the symbol notice command. Becomes

Further, on the main board 102 as well, it is possible to create information (preliminary determination information) related to pre-determination common to outliers and jackpots, without referring to information relating to the result of the lottery by the design random number. Become.
<Relationship between the number of hit symbol notice effect commands related to hits and jackpots>

As described above, with regard to the symbol notice command in this embodiment, the result “1” is assigned to the commands 00 (00H) to 10 (0AH) of which the result of the winning/disapproval lottery relates to the special drawing 1 , Command 11 (0BH) is assigned “second deviation” (see FIG. 16A). Regarding the deviation according to Toku-zu 2, “first deviation” is assigned to all the commands 00H to 08H.

Furthermore, regarding the commands when the result of the win/loss lottery is a big hit, 16R probability variation 1 to 5 and 4R probability variation 1 to 12 types of commands related to Toku-zu 1 and 8 types of commands related to Toku-zu 2 One of 4, 4R usually 1 to 6 is assigned.

Then, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol notice commands handled as common EVENT commands is the second deviation, 4R normal 3 and one (one command) each. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of deviating symbols are included in the second deviating and the third deviating, the second deviating to the Nth deviating (N is a natural number of N>2). A specific EVENT command is selected for the range of the design random number that determines, or the EVENT command that can be selected from the range of the design random number corresponding to the second deviation is 10 (0AH), 11 (0BH) and plural. Any of these can be set as an EVENT command corresponding to a low profit big hit (4R normal 3).
<Restriction of production related to specific winning symbol notice production command>

Further, in the present embodiment, in the sub-main substrate 301 side, when performing the pre-reading effect of super reach or more based on the symbol notice command in which the EVENT command is 11 (0BH), the effect pattern of the pre-reading effect to be selected is selected. There are limits. The reason for setting the look-ahead effect in this way is as follows.

In other words, among the various types of jackpots, the jackpot of "4R normal" is a jackpot in which the player's profit is minimized in the present embodiment, as compared with jackpots of "16R certainty variation" and "4R certainty variation". .. In addition, it can be understood that such a big hit with a small profit is a big hit that is close to the margin. Here, the “4R normal” big hit can also be referred to as “minimum profit big hit”, “low profit big hit”, etc. in comparison with other big hits.

Then, on the side of the sub-main substrate 301, the look-ahead effect is performed in exactly the same manner as a big hit with a small profit, or a big hit with a large profit such as "16R probability change" for a margin that only develops to reach. It is conceivable that the content of the production and the amount of profit will be unbalanced, which may give the player a feeling of discomfort or discouragement.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the color of the hold display is red, gold, or iridescent, when the hold (also referred to as “trigger hold”) is exhausted, a big hit occurs. The expectation that it will occur will be high. Then, when the suspension of the color changed to red, gold, iridescent, or the like is exhausted, in the present embodiment, the production pattern of super reach or higher is developed at a rate of almost 100%. Then, if the result of the winning/disapproving lottery is out of order, the holding prefetching effect such as red, gold, or rainbow color is hardly executed, and the holding prefetching effect such as red, gold, or rainbow color is performed by the player. On the other hand, it is expected that the production at the time of hold digestion will develop to "super reach or more".

Therefore, when an effect of holding change such as changing to red, gold, iridescent, etc. is made in a situation where the held stored lottery result (holding lottery result) is hit with "4R normal", It is considered that the player expects a big hit with a large profit such as "16R probability change". However, the changed hold display is moved to the variation information display unit 195 (see FIG. 7(a)) described above, the variation display of the special symbol is started, and then the variation display of the special symbol is finished, At the stage when the lottery result of “4R normal” is confirmed and informed, the degree of discouragement of the player can be extremely large.

However, in this embodiment, when the EVENT command 11 (0BH) common to the “second deviation” and the “4R normal” is received on the side of the sub-main board 301, the pre-reading is performed as described above. The production is limited. That is, when the EVENT command 11 (0BH), which is a specific EVENT command, is received among the EVENT command commands 00 (00H) to 11 (0BH) related to the symbol notice of the special figure 1, other information is received. Compared with the case where the number of types of pre-productions that can be selected as pre-productions such as a pending change is limited to a small number, the type of pre-production is determined. The content of the read-ahead restriction may be that the hold display is not performed in a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the predetermined hold display for the hold change look-ahead, for example. More specifically, when the commonized EVENT command 11 (0BH) is performed, the lottery table is switched or used as an argument of the lottery table, and only the limited effects are determined as the lottery target. For example, only red pending changes are executed, and premier (major jackpot) pending changes such as gold and iridescent are not executed.

Therefore, it is possible to make the specific deviation and the performance tendency of the big hit with a small profit similar to each other. As a result, it is possible to easily balance the contents of the pre-reading effect with the contents of the profit of the big hit, and it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player when the big hit with the small profit is obtained. Further, as described above, such a well-balanced look-ahead effect is performed by a simple process using the EVENT command 11 (0BH) in which the values are the same for “second deviation” and “4R normal”. It is possible.

As a processing mode for performing a restriction such that only the red pending change is executed, for example, even if an effect pattern is selected with a pending change to gold or rainbow, the selected effect pattern is canceled. It is conceivable that the effect pattern is selected again and the effect pattern that is executed only up to red is selected again. It is also conceivable that an effect pattern including a pending change such as a gold color or a rainbow color may be excluded from selection targets in advance, and an effect pattern related to prefetching may be selected from those that are executed only up to red.

Further, in the above-described specific example, when the hold display is changed to red, gold, or iridescent, while the effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the super reach is almost 100%. Although the above-mentioned production is assumed to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be (at a rate of 100%) or more of the super reach. Furthermore, when the hold display is red, for example, 80% or more of the effect of super reach or more is executed, and when the hold display is gold or iridescent, the reach is always (100%). The above effects may be executed. Further, when the result of the win/loss lottery is a big hit, the big hit confirmation display may be always performed through the super reach (at a rate of 100%). Further, the pre-reading effect may be limited to the pre-reading effect other than the hold change.

Further, in the present embodiment, as one mode of winning, a small hit is provided in addition to the big hit, and a plurality of types of symbols are associated as the small hit design. However, as for the small hit, the notice effect related to the small hit is not performed as the pre-reading effect based on the advance notification information.
<Various processes executed on main board for prefetching effect>

Next, various kinds of processing executed on the main board 102 for the above-described prefetching effect will be described. And here, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) executed in the game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13), the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60), and various processes executed in relation to these The processing (subroutine) will be described.

As the processing executed in relation to the starting opening monitoring control processing (S56 in FIG. 13, refer to FIG. 17), the starting opening monitoring processing (refer to FIGS. 18 and 19), operation reserve ball number updating processing (refer to FIG. 20) ), counter addition processing, signal output request processing, random number storage processing, notice production determination processing (see FIG. 21), selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 22), command request setting processing, symbol storage number command request processing, and the like.

The special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60 in FIG. 13, see FIG. 23) is executed in relation to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (see FIG. 24), special symbol hit determination process, symbol Determination process (see FIG. 25), selection number acquisition process, byte data acquisition process, 1-byte selection number acquisition process (see FIG. 26), time saving determination process, special electric winning combination setting process, fluctuation pattern mode setting process, demonstration time There are setting processing and RWM clear processing.
<Starting port monitoring control processing>

As described above, the starting opening monitoring control process (see FIG. 17) monitors the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 62) of the game ball and the starting opening 2 (second starting winning opening 63) of the game ball. belongs to. Among these, in the monitoring of the starting opening 1 winning of the game ball, in order to monitor the starting opening 1 winning of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring process (FIG. 27) is performed using the address of the starting opening 1 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument. 18, see FIG. 19). Details of the above-described starting port 1 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) and the starting port monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) will be described later.

In the above-mentioned monitoring of the starting opening 2 winning of the game ball, in order to monitor the starting opening 2 winning of the game ball, the value of the starting opening 2 valid period flag is inspected. Then, as a result of the inspection, when the value of the starting port 2 valid period flag is the starting port 2 valid period data (01H in this case), the starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is used as an argument for the starting port monitoring process (FIG. 27). 18, see FIG. 19). Details of the above-mentioned starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) will be described later.

FIG. 17 shows a flowchart of the starting port monitoring control process. In this starting port monitoring control process, the address of the starting port 1 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S101), and the starting port monitoring process (S102) is executed. As will be described later, the starting opening monitoring process (S102) is to monitor the starting winnings for each starting opening and, in a predetermined case, obtain various random numbers and send a command transmission request. As described above, the details of the starting opening monitoring process (S102) will be described later.

Then, the value of the starting port 2 valid period flag is loaded (S103), and it is determined whether the loaded value is different from the starting port 2 valid period data (here 01H) (S104). Then, if the loaded value does not differ from the starting port 2 valid period data (S104: NO), the address of the starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S105), and the starting port related to the starting port 2 is set. The monitoring process (S106) is executed.

Here, the same control module is used for the above-described starting opening monitoring processing (S102) for the starting opening 1 and the starting opening monitoring processing (S106) for the starting opening 2.

When the start opening monitoring process (S106) related to the start opening 2 is finished, the process returns to the return (RET) and shifts to the process after the start opening monitoring control process (S56) in the game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13). If the loaded value is different from the starting port 2 effective period data in the determination processing in S104 described above (S104: YES), the process does not proceed to S105 and returns (RET).

The above-described S103 and S104 are processes for determining the valid period for the starting port 2 after the starting port monitoring process (S102) for the starting port 1. The valid period is determined for the starting opening 2 because the opening 2 (the second starting winning opening 63) is an ordinary electric accessory as described above in the present embodiment. This is because it is effective only during the opening period and during the predetermined grace period after the closing of the opening and closing blades, and during the other periods, the starting opening monitoring of the starting opening 2 is not performed. ..

The above-mentioned starting port 1 monitoring table and starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) are used in the starting port monitoring process when a ball entering the first starting winning port 62 or the second starting winning port 63 is detected. It defines necessary data for various types of handling information subject to.

Then, as the handling information defined in the starting port 1 monitoring table and the starting port 2 monitoring table, as shown in FIG. 27, the starting port 1 (or 2) switch bit data, special figure 1 (or 2) operation hold Sphere address (lower), special figure 1 (or 2) random number transfer table address (lower), special figure 1 (or 2) random number transfer table address (upper), RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (or 1) ) Address (lower) and so on. Further, in the starting port 1 monitoring table and the starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27), special symbol 1 (or 2) operation data, the address of the winning symbol notice determination value table 1 (or 2) (lower), the winning symbol The address (upper) of the notice determination value table 1 (or 2), the data of EVENT (the initial value 0 of the winning symbol notice effect command), and the like are also defined.
<Starting port monitoring process>

Next, the above-mentioned starting port monitoring processing (see FIGS. 18 and 19) will be described. This start opening monitoring process monitors the start opening winning of the game ball (start winning into the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63) and acquires the above-mentioned built-in random number (hardware random number). Furthermore, if the number of special symbol operation holding balls (holding number) is less than 4 and the starting mouth winning of the game ball is confirmed, the special symbol random number (random number) is acquired, the random number related to the special symbol (the symbol random number) ), the command transmission request of the notice effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the start mouth, and the special symbol display device (70, 71) operation reserved ball number (special symbol operation reserved ball number (reserved number)) Corresponding command transmission requests are made in order.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Monitoring of game ball starting mouth winning and acquisition of built-in random number

In the above-mentioned monitoring of the starting opening winning of the game ball and acquisition of the built-in random number, in order to monitor the starting opening winning of the game ball and acquire the built-in random number, the input data base address (starting opening 1 (or 2 here) is used. ) The operation-holding ball number updating process (see FIG. 20) is executed with the (start address of the monitoring table) as an argument. The details of this operation-holding ball number updating process (see FIG. 20) will be described later. Then, as a result of execution of the operation reserve ball number update process (see FIG. 20), if it is confirmed that the operation reserve ball number is updated, the game ball is the starting opening when the special symbol operation reserve ball number is less than 4 It is judged that the prize has been won. As will be described later, random number data is acquired in the operation reserve ball number updating process (see FIG. 20), and the acquired random number data is used as a built-in random number. The base address means an address value stored in a register (HL register) in the CPU 501 of the main board 102, which is necessary for a process being executed.
2. Acquisition of random number per special symbol

In the acquisition of the random number per special symbol (random number), as a random number per special symbol, the value of the soft random number per special symbol is added to the built-in random number (hard random number) acquired in the operation holding ball number updating process (S111). Then, it is stored in the random number per special symbol buffer of the RWM storage area which is the storage destination of the reserved random number.
3. Storage of random numbers related to special symbols (random symbols)

In the storage of the random numbers related to the special symbols (symbol random numbers) described above, in order to store the random numbers related to the special symbols, the input data base address (start address of the starting opening 1 (or 2) monitoring table) + table offset The 2-byte address indicated by 2(2) is used as the random number transfer table address, and the random number storage process is executed using the acquired random number transfer table address as an argument. Details of this random number storage processing will be described later.

Here, the notation of “table offset A(N)” (N is a natural number including 0) such as the above-mentioned “table offset 2(2)” indicates a table offset amount, and “A” is a variable name. “N” represents a value. For example, "table offset 2 (2)" indicates that the offset amount data stored in the "table offset 2" area is "02H". Further, for example, in the case of "table offset 0 (0)", it indicates that the offset amount data stored in the "table offset 0" area is "00H", and "table offset 8 (8)" “” indicates that the offset amount data stored in the “table offset 8” area is “08H”. Further, the table offset is stored as a calculated value at a predetermined address of the RWM, and is programmed so that an arbitrary table offset A(N) is directly addressed.
4. Command transmission request for advance notice production corresponding to the random number stored when winning

In the command transmission request for the notice effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting mouth, the command request for the notice effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of starting prize is issued, so the state of the gaming machine is confirmed and the command transmission period When it is determined, the winning/notifying random number, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are used to sequentially make a winning notice production request, a winning symbol notice production request, and a pattern notice production request.
(1) Confirmation of gaming machine status

In the above-mentioned state confirmation of the gaming machine, when any of the following conditions (first condition to third condition) is satisfied, it is determined that the command transmission period. First, the first condition is to store a random number related to the special symbol 1 while waiting for a hit, and while the probability varying function of the normal symbol display device is not in operation.

Then, as described above, when the value of the special game status is 0, it is determined to be in the hit waiting state. Also, if the value of the normal symbol mode flag is 0, and, if the content of the input data base address + table offset 5 (5) is special symbol 1 operation data (00H), probability fluctuation of the normal symbol display device It is determined to store the random number related to the special symbol 1 while the function is not operating.

The second condition is that the random number related to the special symbol 2 is stored while waiting for a hit, and while the probability varying function of the normal symbol display device is operating. Then, when the value of the special game status is 0, it is determined to be in the hit waiting state. Also, if the value of the normal symbol mode flag is 1, and the content of the input data base address + table offset 5 (5) is special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH), probability fluctuation of the normal symbol display device It is determined to store the random number related to the special symbol 2 while the function is not operating.

The third condition is to store the random number related to the special symbol 2 during the big hit or the small hit. And, if the value of the above-mentioned special electric game status is other than 0, and if the content indicated by the input data base address + table offset 5 (5) is special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH), a big hit medium or small hit It is determined that the random number relating to the special symbol 2 is stored. The condition of the command transmission period according to these gaming states is provided for the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment to perform control related to the limitation of the prefetching effect by the main board 102. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when controlling the presence/absence of pre-reading on the sub-main substrate 301, the advance notice command may always be transmitted regardless of the condition. In addition, the condition of the main board 102 also depends on the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, the winning order in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2), and the advance notice is made by storing the random number related to the special symbol 2 while the probability varying function of the ordinary symbol display device is not operating. Various changes can be made, such as transmitting information.
(2) Winning notice production request

Further, as a result of checking the state of the gaming machine, in the hit notice effect request when it is determined to be the command transmission period, since the hit notice effect request is made, the address of the hit notice determination value table (see FIG. 31), the special symbol hit The advance notice determination process is executed with the value obtained by incrementing the value of the random number buffer by 1, the MODE (hit notice effect) data (D0H) and EVENT (the initial value (00H) of the data) as arguments. Details of the advance notice determination process will be described later. To do.
(3) Winning design notice production request

Further, as a result of checking the state of the gaming machine, in the hit symbol notice effect request when it is determined to be the command transmission period, in order to make the hit symbol notice effect request, the input data base address (starting opening 1 (or 2) The lower address of the winning symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31) is acquired from the 2-byte address indicated by (the top address of the monitoring table)+table offset 6 (6), and the winning symbol notice determination value table (Fig. 31) is acquired from the next address. 31)). Furthermore, the value of the special symbol random number, MODE (winning symbol notice effect) data (D1H) and the contents of the input data base address + table offset 8 (8) (initial value of EVENT data (00H)) are used as arguments. The notice production determination process (see FIG. 21) is executed. As described above, the details of this advance notice effect determination processing (see FIG. 21) will be described later.
(4) Pattern notice production request

Further, as a result of checking the state of the gaming machine, in the pattern notice production request when it is determined to be the command transmission period, since the pattern notice production request is made, the address of the pattern notice judgment value table, the value of the variable pattern random number, MODE ( Pattern notice production) data (D2H) and EVENT data initial value (00H) are used as arguments to execute the notice production determination process. As described above, the details of the notice effect determination process will be described later.

Here, of the hit notice production request, the hit design notice production request, and the pattern notice production request, only the hit design notice production request is configured to calculate the address of the determination value table in the starting opening 1 (or 2) monitoring table. This is because only the winning symbol notice is changed to the table used in the special symbols 1 and 2 (see FIG. 16(a)). Therefore, also in the hit notice production request and the pattern notice production request, when switching the notice judgment value table to be referred to depending on the starting openings 1 and 2 and other game states (such as the number of reserved balls), the starting opening 1 (or 2) It is possible to design the monitoring table to store the calculated address value of the notice determination value table.
5. Command transmission request corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol display device

In the command transmission request corresponding to the above-mentioned special symbol display device (70, 71) operation holding ball number (special symbol operation holding ball number (holding number)), the operation of the special symbol display device 1 and the special symbol display device 2 In order to request an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls, a symbol memory number command request process is executed. This symbol storage number command request processing is performed using the same control module as the symbol storage number command request processing (S12) in the control start processing (see FIGS. 11 and 12) described above. The details of the symbol storage number command request processing will be described later.

18 and 19 show a flowchart of the above-mentioned starting opening monitoring processing executed in the starting opening monitoring control processing (see FIG. 17). In the starting opening monitoring process, first, the operation reserve ball number updating process (S111) is performed. This operation-holding ball number updating process (S111) includes acquisition of a built-in random number (hard random number used to calculate the winning/discarding random number), monitoring of game ball passing through the switch, update of operation-holding ball number, and output of external information 2. Although it is created (see FIG. 20), its details will be described later.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of operation-reserving balls has been updated (S112). If the number of operation-retaining balls has not been updated (S112: YES), the process exits the starting port monitoring process and returns. When there is an update of the number of operation-holding balls (S112: NO), the value of the soft random number per special symbol is loaded (S113), and the random number data (internal random number) is added to the loaded value (S114). Further, the addition result is stored in the random number buffer for each special symbol (S115), and the content of the data base address (starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table start address)+table offset 2(2) as the random number transfer table address (random number). The address (lower order) of the transfer table is loaded (S116), and the random number storage process is executed (S117).

Here, the above-described four processes of S113 to S116 are for performing an operation (addition) of the hardware random number (hard random number) and the software random number (soft random number) related to the above-mentioned right/wrong random number. The details of the random number storage process described above will be described later.

Then, the value of the special electric game status is loaded (S118), and if the loaded value is 0 (S119: YES), the value of the normal symbol mode flag is loaded as the inspection data (S122). On the other hand, in S119 described above, if the loaded value is not 0 (S119: NO), the data base address (starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table start address) + table offset 5 (5) contents (special symbol 1 (2) operation data) is loaded (S120). Furthermore, it is determined whether the loaded value is special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH) (S121), and if the special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH) (S121: YES), the processes of S122 to S124 are performed. Instead, the processing of S125 described above is executed.

Here, the above-mentioned determination result of S119 is YES if the jackpot (or small hit) is not normally performed and is NO if the jackpot is being hit. Further, the determination result of S121, which is executed when the determination result of S119 is a big hit, is YES if the big hit of special figure 2 is in progress, and NO if the big hit of special figure 1 is in progress. is there.

If the determination result of S119 is YES (normal) (S119: YES), the contents of the data base address+table offset 5(5) are added to the inspection data (S123), and the addition result is 0. If not (S124: NO), the address of the table of the hit announcement determination value is set (S125).

On the other hand, in S124, if the addition result is 0 (S124: NO), the process after S125 (S125 to S138) is not performed, but the symbol storage number command request process (S139) described later is executed. Here, the above S119 to S124 are processes for determining the second condition related to the above-mentioned "(1) Confirmation of gaming machine state". Then, the contents of the processing of S119 to S124 are such that the notice information for prefetching regarding the suspension according to Toku-zu 2 during the time saving is stored, and the notice information is not stored for Toku-zu 1.

It should be noted that, for example, in a predetermined situation such as a timing of exiting from a time saving period to a non-time saving period, it is considered that it is not particularly necessary to perform a look-ahead effect to raise the expectation of the player. Therefore, by the above S122 to S124, the advance notice information is not generated when such a specific timing is applicable, and the prefetch effect is not executed at a timing that is not necessarily effective. Good.

Following S125 described above, the value of the random number buffer per special symbol is loaded as the random number data 1 (S126), and the random number data is incremented by 1 (S127). Further, MODE (winning notice effect) data (D0H) is set as the MODE data, and EVENT (winning notice effect 0) data (00H) is set as the EVENT data (S128). Then, the notice effect determination process (S129) is executed. The details of the notice production determination process (S129) will be described later.

Here, the above-mentioned S128 is for clearing the EVENT data relating to the hit announcement effect command created last time. Then, by the process of S128, the EVENT data of the hit announcement effect command is prevented from becoming a value outside the predetermined range (here, 00H to 04H).

Subsequently, the contents of the data base address+table offset 6 (6) are loaded as the winning symbol advance notice determination value table address (S130), and the value of the special symbol random number is loaded as the random number data 2 (S131). Further, MODE (winning symbol notice effect) data (D1H) is set in the MODE data (S132), and the contents of the data base address+table offset 8(8) are loaded in the EVENT data (S133). After that, as shown in FIG. 19, a notice effect determination process (S134) described later is executed.

Then, the address of the pattern notice determination value table is set (S135), and the value of the variable pattern random number is loaded as the random number data 3 (S136). Further, MODE (pattern notice effect) data (D2H) is set in the MODE data, and EVENT (pattern notice effect 0) data (00H) is set in the EVENT data (S137). Then, a notice effect determination process (S134) which will be described later is executed, and a symbol storage number command request process (S139) is further executed and the process returns. Details of the symbol storage number command request process (S139) will be described later.

Here, the above-mentioned S137 is for clearing the EVENT data relating to the pattern notice effect command previously created. By the processing of S137, the EVENT data of the pattern notice effect command is prevented from becoming a value outside the predetermined range.

Further, the determination result of S121 described above is YES when holding storage for operation according to Toku-zu 2 is performed, and NO when holding storage for operation according to Toku-zu 1 is performed. Then, if NO is determined in S121 (S121: NO), the above-mentioned symbol storage number command request processing (S139) is executed without performing other processing. As a result, during the big hit (small hit), the advance notice information regarding prefetching is controlled to be stored only for the special figure 2.
<Operation reserve ball number update process>

Next, the above-mentioned operation reserved ball number updating process (see S111 in FIG. 18) will be described. In this operation holding ball number updating process (see FIG. 20), after the built-in random number is acquired, the game ball is monitored for passing through the switch, and when it is determined that the game ball is passing through the switch, the operation holding ball is held. Update the number and create an output request for external information 2.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Get built-in random number

In the above-mentioned acquisition of the built-in random number, the input base address (starting port 1 (or 2) start address of the monitoring table)+table offset 4 (4) contents (RL0 hard latch random number register 0 (or 1)) Address) as the lower address of the built-in random number, and the built-in register top higher address (0FEH) as the higher address of the built-in random number, the built-in random number of the built-in random number indicating the storage area in which the random number hard-latched when the start mouth winning is detected by the sensor is stored. It is obtained as an internal random number from the address (register address).
2. Monitor the game ball passing through the switch

In the above-mentioned game ball switch passing monitoring, in order to monitor the game ball switch passing, the value of the board surface switch rising edge and the input data base address (starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table start address)+ The logical product of the contents indicated by the table offset 0 (0) is taken, and when the result of the logical product is not 0, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the switch. As a result, when the game sphere passes through the switch, the subsequent processing is executed if the flag indicating that the incoming ball has been detected is set, and if the above flag is not set, the subsequent processing is not executed. It is like this.
3. Update the number of pending balls

In updating the number of operation-reserving spheres described above, in order to update the number of operation-retaining spheres, the counter shown in FIG. Executes addition processing. Details of this counter addition processing will be described later. It should be noted that whether or not the number of operation-reserving balls is incremented by 1 is reflected in the flag. As a result, the value of the reserved number at that time is stored.
4. Create output request for external information 2

In creating the output request of the external information 2 described above, the signal output request processing is executed with the address +1 of the starting port information timer as an argument in order to create the output request of the external information 2. Details of this signal output request processing will be described later.

FIG. 20 shows a flowchart of the operation reserve ball number updating process. In the operation reserve ball number updating process, first, the internal register head upper address (0FEH) is set as the internal random number upper address (S141). Further, the contents of the data base address+table offset 4(4) are loaded as the built-in random number lower address (S142), and the contents of the built-in random number address are loaded as random number data (S143). Then, the value of the rising edge of the board switch is loaded (S144), and the loaded value is ANDed with the content of the data base address+table offset 0 (0) (S145).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product in S145 is 0 (S146), and if not 0 (S146: NO), the contents of the data base address+table offset 1(1) are set as the RWM lower address. It is loaded (S147). Furthermore, the maximum value (4) of the number of operation-reserving balls is set (S148), and counter addition processing (S149) is executed. Details of this counter addition processing (S149) will be described later.

After that, the address +1 of the starting port information timer is set as the RWM address (S150), the signal output request process (S151) is executed, and the process returns. Here, if the result of the logical product is 0 in S146 (S146: YES), the process returns without performing the processes of S147 to S151. The details of the signal output request process (S151) will be described later.
<Counter addition processing>

Next, the above-mentioned counter addition processing (see S149 in FIG. 20) will be described. In this counter addition processing (S149), if the content of the RWM indicated by the input lower counter address and the RWM head upper address (0F0H) is smaller than the maximum value of the input counter, the content of the input counter address is incremented by +1. To do. It should be noted that whether or not the content of the counter address is incremented by 1 is reflected in the flag.
<Signal output request processing>

Next, the aforementioned signal output request processing (see S151 in FIG. 20) will be described. In this signal output request processing (S151), in order to update the signal output request, if the content indicated by the input RWM address is less than 255, the content indicated by the input RWM address is incremented by one. It should be noted that this signal output request processing is also called by the ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S62) in the game progress interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) described above, and after various signal information is generated, S70 (see FIG. 13) is generated. It is output to the management computer of the game store by the external information output processing.
<Random number storage processing>

Next, the random number storage process (see S117 of FIG. 18) described above will be described. In the starting port monitoring process (see FIG. 18) described above, only the random number transfer table address (lower level) was called in the process (S116) preceding the random number storage process (S117), but the random number storage process (S117) that is a sub-module. The upper address is also called in). More specifically, in this random number storing process, the input random number transfer table address is used to store the number of operation holding balls corresponding to the value of the number of operation holding balls to which the transfer source (random number buffer) transfers the random numbers. By transferring the random numbers to the random number storage area, the random numbers are stored for the winning and rejecting random numbers, the pattern random numbers, and the variation pattern random numbers. The operation-holding ball lower address to be the transfer destination is a value obtained by adding the product of the value of the operation-holding ball number and the transfer byte number and the lower address of the start address of the transfer RWM address, and the operation-holding ball upper address and the transfer destination. The upper address of the area is the RWM head upper address (0F0H).

Further, the address of the random number transfer table, the address of the number of operation-holding balls, etc. are set in the starting port 1 (or starting port 2) monitoring table (see FIG. 27) described later, and are read from these tables.
<Preliminary effect determination process>

Next, the previously described notice effect determination process (see S129, S134, and S138 in FIG. 18) will be described. In the notice effect determination process, after the notice effect determination is performed, a command for the notice effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is issued.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Notice production judgment

In the above-mentioned notice effect determination, in order to perform the notice effect determination, the selection number acquisition process is executed using the address of the inputted notice effect determination value table, the input random number data, and the EVENT data as arguments. Details of this selection number acquisition processing will be described later.
2. Command request of notice production corresponding to the result of notice production judgment

In the command request for the notice effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination described above, since the command request for the notice effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is made, the input MODE data and the selection number acquired in the notice effect determination are input. Execute the command request setting process as an argument. Details of this command request setting process will be described later.

FIG. 21 shows a flowchart of the notice effect determination process. In this starting opening monitoring process, the selection number acquisition process (S161) and the command request setting process (S162) are sequentially executed. Details of these selection number acquisition processing (S161) and command request setting processing (S162) will be described later.

Here, such a notice effect determination process is a process that is executed a total of three times in the above-described starting opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) (S129, S134, S148). Then, the notice effect determination process is performed for each of the winning notice, the winning symbol notice, and the pattern notice, which are information (transmission information) to be transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301, within a numerical range corresponding to which lottery result of the target random number. It is a process of determining whether it belongs.
<Selection number acquisition process>

Next, the above-mentioned selection number acquisition processing (see S161 in FIG. 21) will be described. In this selection number acquisition process, the selection number corresponding to the random number data input is determined from the input drawing table address and the input selection number.

More specifically, the selection number input as the number setting value is set, and the random number comparison value of the input drawing table is sequentially subtracted from the input random number data. When the subtraction result is less than 0, the calculated number setting value is set to the output selection number, and the process ends. If the subtraction result is 0 or more, the number setting value is incremented by 1 to continue the process. If the higher random number comparison value is FFH, the lower number of the random number comparison value is added to the number setting value without subtraction. Continue processing.

FIG. 22 shows a flowchart of the selection number acquisition process. In this selection number acquisition processing, first, the contents of the drawing table address+1 (data higher in the random number comparison value in this determination) are loaded as inspection data (S171). Further, the loaded value is incremented by 1 (S172), and when the addition result is 0 (S173: NO), the contents of the lottery table address (lower order random number comparison value data in this determination) are added to the selection number. (S174). Then, in the next determination, the drawing table address is incremented by 2 to refer to the next random number comparison value (S178), and the process returns to S171.

When the addition result is not 0 (that is, the data of the higher random number comparison value this time is not FFH) in S173 described above (S173: YES), the contents of the drawing table address are subtracted from the random number data (S175). Then, if the subtraction result is not less than 0 (S176: NO), the selection number is incremented by 1 (S177), and the process of S178 described above is executed. In S176 described above, if the subtraction result is less than 0 (S176: YES), the current selection number is determined and the process returns. Here, in S175 described above, what is subtracted from the random number data is 2-byte data (0 to 65535) composed of the random number comparison value upper and lower data.

Such a selection number acquisition process can be performed by the same method as the preliminary determination (preliminary determination based on each group of the numerical ranges a to e) for the above-mentioned winning notice production or the winning notice production. It is used in a process that requires a 2-byte data lottery, such as a notice production or a notice production determination process performed for a preliminary determination for a pattern notice production.

Then, in this selection number acquisition processing, a selection number indicating a predetermined random number value range is set, and the random number comparison value defined in the drawing table is sequentially subtracted based on the acquired random number value (random number data). If the subtraction result is 0 or more, the number setting value of the selection number is incremented by 1, the next random number comparison value is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is less than 0. If the calculation result becomes less than 0 as a result of repeating such processing, the calculated number setting value is set to the output selection number, and the processing ends. Then, in the selection number acquisition process, various random numbers (winning or rejecting random number, symbol random number, variation pattern random number) and various notice determination value tables (such as hit notice determination value table and hit notice notice determination value table shown in FIG. 31) are used. , Quantify the range to which various random numbers belong.

The random number comparison value described above can be associated with the upper limit values of the numerical ranges a to e in the prior determination method by grouping the random number value ranges described above in the hit announcement determination value table, for example. Then, the 2-byte value related to this upper limit value is set each time according to the target of the lottery determination (hit, design, effect pattern, etc.), and the calculation result of the acquired random number value and the random number comparison value is 0 or more. Subsequent processing is executed depending on whether or not

The selection numbers when the selection number acquisition process is performed in the notice production determination process are the EVENT data of the hit notice production command, the winning design notice production command, and the pattern notice production command, and the value at the start of the process is S128. , S133, S137, 00H.
<Command request setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned command request setting process (see S162 in FIG. 21) will be described. In this command request setting process, since the input MODE data and EVENT data are stored in the command buffer, command data is created and command data is stored.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Creating command data

In the above-described command data creation, in order to create command data, the RWM unused determination bit (bit 7) of the input MODE data is inspected. When the result of the check is 0, the input EVENT data is the RWM lower address, the RWM head upper address (0F0H) is the RWM upper address, and the contents of the RWM address are the command EVEN.
T data. Further, the MODE data identification bit (bit 7) is set in the input MODE data to make it command MODE data. If the inspection result is 1, the input MODE data is the command MODE data, and the input EVENT data is the command EVENT data. In the above-mentioned notice production determination process (see FIG. 21), since the MODE data is (D0, D1, D2H), the RWM unused determination bit is "1", and the EVENT data is generated using the RWM. Absent. The EVENT data is the selection number determined in the selection number acquisition process described above.
2. Storing command data

In the storage of the command data described above, the value of the command request writing position and the double value of the logical product of the position correction bit data (00111111B=63) and the address of the command request writing position are added. In this embodiment, the ring buffer has a storage area of 128 bytes (64 commands). Then, in the above-mentioned logical product operation, a value that is offset from the head address of the ring buffer is calculated from the data at the command request writing position by performing a double operation (left shift). Then, as described above, this offset value and the address of the command request writing position (=the position of the leading address-2 of the ring buffer) are added.

Further, the command EVENT data acquired by creating the command data is stored in the calculated address +2, and the command MODE data acquired by creating the command data is stored in the calculated address +3. After the value of the command request writing position is acquired, the value of the command request writing position is incremented by 1 to update the storage position of the command data.

Note that this command request setting process is the abnormality detection process (S61) in the game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13), the entry time abnormality detection process (S62), and the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S64). ) Etc. is called in the process of setting a command to be transmitted to the sub-main board.
<Design memory count command request processing>

Next, the above-mentioned symbol storage number command request processing (S139 in FIG. 19) will be described. In this symbol storage number command request processing, in order to request a production command corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device 1 and the special symbol display device 2, MODE (special symbol storage number) data (90H) and EVENT Execute command request setting process using data as an argument. In addition, the result of the logical sum of the value obtained by exchanging the high-order 4 bits and the low-order 4 bits of the value of the special figure 2 operation reserved sphere number and the value of the special figure 1 operation reserved sphere number is EVEVT data. That is, in the 1-byte data indicating the EVENT command, the upper 4 bits are the number of reserved balls of special figure 2, the lower 4 bits are the number of reserved balls of special figure 1, and the command is transmitted once for special figures 1 and 2. The number of reserved balls can be sent to the main.

In such a symbol storage number command request process, a process for notifying the sub-main board 301 of the data of the number of holdings (holding number command) is stored in the transmission waiting buffer (ring buffer). Then, the commands stored in the transmission waiting buffer are sequentially transmitted from the transmission waiting buffer to the sub main board 301. In addition, this symbol storage number command request processing is performed when the hold number command cannot be normally transmitted to the sub-main substrate 301 at the time of winning the power at the moment of power-off, or the sub-board 104 side after power-off recovery (particularly the sub-sub-board 301) In order to display the number of holdings during the return operation of (1), it is also called in the processing (S9 to S17) at the time of power-off recovery in the control start processing (see FIG. 12) described above (see S12).
<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing>

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol variation start monitoring control process (see S60 of FIG. 13) will be described. In this special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S60), the variation start of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) and the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) is monitored.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Monitoring of start of fluctuation of special symbol 2 (second special symbol)

In the monitoring of the variation start of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) described above, in order to monitor the variation start of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol), the special symbol 2 game status (see FIG. 16(b)) The special symbol variation start monitoring process is executed using the address of the special symbol variation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument. Details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process will be described later.
2. Monitoring of start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (first special symbol)

In the variation start monitoring of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) described above, in order to monitor the variation start of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), the special symbol 1 game status (see FIG. 16(b)) The special symbol variation start monitoring process is executed using the address of the special symbol variation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument.

FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process. In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, first, the address of the special figure 2 game status is set (S181). Furthermore, the address of the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S182), and the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S183) is executed. This special symbol variation start monitoring process (S183) will be described later.

Then, the address of the special figure 1 game status is set (S184). Furthermore, the address of the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S185), and special symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing (S186) is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the status address and the fluctuation start monitoring table address are set for special figure 2 and special figure 1, but these addresses are set for different registers. Is done. Then, here, the status address is set in the HL register and the DE register. Any of the addresses set in these registers is used as a base address until the special symbol variation start monitoring control process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second game is prioritized (priority control) over the first game, so in this special symbol variation start monitoring control processing, monitoring relating to special figure 2 (S181) To S183) are performed before the monitoring (S184 to S186) according to Toku-zu 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the reserved memory is exhausted in the order in which the start winnings are generated and stored in the reserved manner (the winning order is consumed), whether the generated starting winnings relate to the special figure 1 or It is conceivable that the determination as to whether it is according to FIG. 2 is performed first, and the variation start monitoring control of the special symbol is performed according to the determination result.

In addition, the above-mentioned special figure 1 game status and special figure 2 game status is the RWM work area which is used even with the special design control processing which is mentioned earlier. In this embodiment, the data of the special figure 1 game status is stored in the address of F03AH, and the data of the special figure 2 game status is stored in the address of F05EH. Furthermore, as the contents of the special figure 1 game status and the special figure 2 game status, as shown in FIG. 16(b), only the special figure 1 game status, a state of waiting for special symbol variation, a state of starting special symbol variation There is a state where the special symbol is changing and a state where the special symbol stop symbol is being displayed.
<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process>

Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (see S183 and S186 in FIG. 23) described above will be described. In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that preparation for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made, the special symbol operation holding ball number is updated, the hit judgment is made, and the symbol is determined. Then, the processing corresponding to the result of the hit determination is performed.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Monitoring the operating status of special symbols

In the monitoring of the operating state of the above-mentioned special symbol, when all of the following four conditions (first condition to fourth condition) are satisfied, it is determined that the preparation for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed. First, the first condition is that the player is in a hit waiting state, and as described above, when the value of the special electric game status is 0, it is determined that the hit waiting state.

Subsequently, the second condition is that the state of the special symbol 1 is waiting for variation, and if the value of the special symbol 1 game status is 0, the state of the special symbol 1 is waiting for variation. To judge. Furthermore, the third condition is that the state of the special symbol 2 is waiting for variation, and if the value of the special symbol 2 game status is 0, the state of the special symbol 2 is waiting for variation. to decide. Further, the fourth condition is that the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is not 0, and if the content of the input RWM base address + RWM offset 5 (5) is not 0, the operation pending ball of the special symbol Judge that the number is not zero. Here, the "special symbol" means the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 that has been determined to start changing as described above (the special symbol that is being processed).
2. Update of special symbol operation holding ball number

In the update of the special symbol operation holding sphere number described above, update (subtraction) of the operation holding sphere number of the special symbol, and the effect command request of the special symbol operation holding sphere number. And, of these, in the production command request of the special symbol operation holding ball number, the operation of the special symbol display device 1 (first special symbol display unit 70) and the special symbol display device 2 (second special symbol display unit 71) In order to request an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls, a symbol memory number command request process is executed. This symbol memory number command request process, the symbol memory number command request process (S12) in the control start process (see FIGS. 11 and 12) described above, and the symbol memory number command in the above-described starting opening monitoring process (see FIG. 19) This is performed using the same control module as the request process (S139).
3. Hit judgment

In the above-mentioned hit determination, after transferring the random number of the special symbol operation holding ball number, since the hit determination is performed by using the transferred hit/miss random number, the special symbol hit determination process is executed using the hit/miss random number as an argument. The details of this special symbol winning determination process will be described later.
4. Design decision

In the above-mentioned symbol determination, in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol, the symbol determination process is executed with the symbol random number as an argument. Details of this symbol determination process will be described later.
5. Processing corresponding to the result of hit judgment

In the process corresponding to the result of the above-described hit determination, since the process corresponding to the result of the hit determination is performed, the hit determination result (winning result) of the special symbol is confirmed. Then, when it is determined that it is a big hit, the setting of the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device (70, 71), the game state setting after the end of the big hit, the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously and the special The operation contents of the electric accessory are set, the variation pattern selection state after the special game is finished, the demonstration effect time is set, the RWM used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set.

When it is judged as a small hit, the number of times the special electric accessory is operated is designated as 1 and the opening pattern is set, and thereafter, the variation pattern selection state is set, the demonstration effect time is set, the hit determination and the pattern are set. Clear the RWM used for determination, and set the state of special symbols. In addition, when it is determined that it is out of alignment, the variation pattern selection state is set, the RWM used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set.
(1) Confirmation of special symbol hit judgment result

Among the processes corresponding to the results of these hit determinations, in the confirmation of the hit determination result of the special symbol, if the value of the special symbol determination flag is the special symbol big hit data (55H), the result of the hit determination is determined to be a big hit. However, in the case of the special symbol small hit data (33H), it is judged as a small hit as a result of the hit judgment, and in other cases, it is judged to be out.
(2) Setting the operation contents of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol display device

In the setting of the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device described above, in order to set the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device, the content of the address calculated corresponding to the special symbol to be a big hit symbol Is stored in the probability variation determination flag indicating.
(3) Game state setting after the big hit

In the game state setting after the big hit described above, the time saving number determination process is executed to set the time saving game state after the big hit ends. The details of the time saving determination processing will be described later.
(4) Big hit game state setting

In the setting of the number of times the special electric auditors product operates continuously and the operation content of the special electric auditors product, the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product and the operation content of the special electric auditors product are set , Special electric accessory setting processing is executed. Details of this special electric auditors product setting process will be described later.
(5) Setting of variation pattern selection state

In the setting of the variation pattern selection state described above, the variation pattern mode setting process is executed to set the content of the variation pattern selection state when the limited frequency pattern table is switched after the jackpot or the time saving game is finished. Details of this variation pattern mode setting process will be described later.
(6) Demonstration time setting

In the setting of the demonstration effect time described above, for the special symbol, among the hit demo commands (big hit start/end demo command, small hit start/end demo command) to be sent to the sub-main, of the EVENT data corresponding to the special symbol In order to select and set, and further to save the time value used for setting the demo display time on the main board 102, the demonstration effect time setting process is executed. The details of this demonstration effect time setting process will be described later.
(7) Clear RWM used for hit judgment and symbol determination

In the clearing of the RWM used for the above-mentioned hit determination and symbol determination, the special symbol hit determination area used for hit determination, and the special symbol symbol determination area used for symbol determination are cleared to 0, so the special symbol hit The RWM clear process is executed using the address of the area and the number of clear bytes (4) as arguments. Details of this RWM clear processing will be described later.
(8) Setting the state of special symbols

In the setting of the state of the special symbol described above, in order to start the fluctuation of the state of the special symbol, the content of the input RWM base address (address of special figure 1 (or 2) game status) + RWM offset 0 (0) To +1 to control the special symbol to "during change".

FIG. 24 shows a flowchart of the special symbol variation start monitoring process. In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, first, the value of the special electric game status is loaded (S191). Further, the loaded value and the content of the special figure 1 game status are ORed (S192), and the result of the OR and the content of the special figure 2 game status are ORed (S193). When the result of the logical sum is not 0, the process returns (SS194: YES), and when it is 0 (S194: NO), the result of the logical sum and the logical sum of the contents of the RWM base address+RWM offset 5(5) are calculated. Take (S195).

Here, although not shown, the RWM base address in S195 is “F03AH” of the special figure 1 status (or “F05EH” of the special figure 2 status) (set in S181 and S184 of FIG. 23). .. Then, in the present embodiment, “RWM base address+RWM offset 5(5)” is an address of an area in which the number of operation-reserving balls of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) is stored.

Here, the processing of S191 to S194 described above is processing for determining whether or not the gaming state in which fluctuation start is possible. That is, in S191, the value indicating the state during the big hit or in the small hit is loaded, and in S192 and S193, the data indicating whether or not the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changing is created. Then, if the game state is, for example, during a change related to a special symbol, during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a demonstration effect related to a big hit, the determination result of S194 is YES (S194: YES), and The special symbol variation start monitoring process ends because it is a situation in which various variations cannot be started. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in these states, the determination result of S194 is NO (S194: NO), and the processing relating to the special symbol variation start monitoring after S195 is executed.

Subsequently, the result of the logical sum calculated in S195 (the number of operation holding balls in special figure 1 or special figure 2) is determined (S196), and if the result of the logical sum is 0 (when there is no holding), return Yes (S196: YES). If the result of the logical sum is not 0 (S196: NO), the contents of the RWM base address+RWM offset 5(5) (the number of operation-holding balls in special figure 1 or special figure 2) are decremented by 1 (S197), A symbol storage number command request process (S198), a special symbol hit determination process (S199), and a symbol determination process (S200) are sequentially executed. Among these, the symbol storage number command request processing (S198) is similar to the above-mentioned symbol storage number command request processing. The details of the special symbol hit determination process (S199) and the symbol determination process (S200) will be described later.

In the processes of S195 and S196 described above, whether the hold related to Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) remains by using the Toku-zu 1 operation holding ball number table (or Toku-zu 2 operation holding ball number table) described later. Whether or not (whether or not there is a right to change) is determined.

That is, this special symbol variation start monitoring process, as described above, in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (see FIG. 23), which is the calling process, the address and characteristics of the status in the order of special figure 2 and special figure 1 This is executed after the addresses of the fluctuation start monitoring table in FIG. 1 (or special figure 2) are set (S181, S182, S184, S185).

More specifically, in S195 in this special symbol variation start monitoring process, the RWM base address is the address of the status set in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (see FIG. 23) which is the calling process. Then, by adding offset 5 (5) to this RWM base address and designating an address five after the base address, the special character variation start supervisory control process (see FIG. 23) is set to the status address. The address storing the number-of-holds information according to the figure is designated. Further, the logical sum of the contents of the designated address (the number-of-holds data of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is calculated (S195), and if there is a reservation, the result of the logical sum becomes ≠0 (S196: NO). Then, the process proceeds to S197 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if there is no hold of the special symbol, the determination result of S196 is YES (S196: YES), and the special symbol variation start monitoring is ended.

The above-mentioned S197 is a process of reducing the data of the number of reservations by one when the fluctuation of the special figure can be started (S196: NO). Further, the symbol storage number command request processing (S198) notifies the sub main board 301 of the reduced number of holdings. Further, it is similar to the above-mentioned symbol storage number command request processing. Further, the details of the special symbol hit determination process (S199) will be described later, but the hit determination is performed based on the obtained random number, and the hit determination data as the determination result is stored. Further, the symbol determination process (S200), which will be described in detail later, determines a winning symbol, a deviating symbol, and a decision regarding an effect based on the hit determination data.

Following the symbol determination process (S200), the value of the special symbol determination flag is loaded as the hit determination data (S201), and the determination process (S202, S203) is executed using the hit determination data. If the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S202: YES), the special electric auditors product setting process (S209) described later is executed. Details of this special electric auditors product setting process (S209) will be described later.

In the above-mentioned S202, when the hit determination data does not match the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S202: NO), a determination process of whether or not the hit determination data matches the special big hit data (55H). Is executed (S203). Then, in S203, if the hit determination data does not match the special symbol big hit data (55H) (S203: YES), the variation pattern mode setting process (S210) is executed. Details of this variation pattern mode setting process will be described later.

In the above-mentioned S203, when the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H) (S203: NO), the value of the group determination number is loaded as an offset (S204). Further, the address of the special symbol probability variation determination table is set as the base address (S205), and the contents of the base address+offset are loaded as 1-byte data (S206). Then, the 1-byte data is stored in the probability variation determination flag (S207), and the subsequent time saving number determination processing (S208) is executed. The details of the time saving determination processing will be described later. The “group determination number” is, as illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B, among the special symbols corresponding to the big hit, the number of rounds, the presence or absence of a probability change, the opening pattern of the special winning opening, and the time saving game. It is a number for managing the same control such as the number of times, and is data determined by the symbol determination process (see FIG. 25).

The processing from S204 to S207 described above determines whether or not there is a probability variation using the group determination number or the address of the special symbol probability variation determination table as an argument, and sets a flag according to the determination result (determination variation setting processing). Has become.

Although the details of the above-mentioned time saving number determination processing (S208) will be described later, the time saving number after the big hit is set. Following this time saving determination processing (S208), special electric auditors product setting processing (S209), variation pattern mode setting processing (S210), and demonstration effect time setting processing (S211) are executed. Of these, the special electric auditors product setting process (S209), which will be described in detail later, sets the opening pattern of each special winning opening (attacker). In this embodiment, if the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) in S202 described above (S202: YES), the process proceeds to the special electric auditors product setting process (S209). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process may be shifted to the time saving number determination process (S208).

The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern mode setting process (S210) is a process for setting and storing a table used for determining a fluctuation pattern (a process for setting and storing a fluctuation pattern mode), which will be described in detail later. In the variation pattern mode setting process (S210), the variation pattern is not set, but the variation pattern mode is set. Then, the table of the variation pattern set in the mode setting process (S210) of this variation pattern is used in the special symbol control process (S57) in the next game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13).

The above-mentioned demonstration effect time setting process (S211) calls up and stores the demonstration effect when the effect symbol is stopped, the time data relating to the hit demonstration effect, etc. described above.

Following the above-mentioned demonstration effect time setting process (S211), the address of the special symbol hit determination area is set as the RWM address (S212). Further, the number of clear bytes (4) is set (S213), and the RWM clear process (S214) is executed. The processing from S212 to S214 is to clear the RWM area of the random number or the random number used in the special symbol variation start monitoring processing this time.

Further, in S213, the number of clear bytes is (4) in order to clear only 2 bytes of the success/failure random number and 2 bytes of the pattern random number. At this stage, the data related to the variation pattern is not targeted for clearing. At this stage, the variation pattern mode setting process (S210) is not performed, and the variation pattern mode is not set. This is because

Following the processing from S212 to S214, the contents of the RWM base address+RWM offset 0(0) are incremented by 1 (S215), the special symbol variation start monitoring processing is terminated, and the processing returns.
<Special electric accessory setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned special electric auditors product setting process (see S209 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this special electric auditors product setting process, the number of times the special electric auditors product operates continuously and the operation content of the special electric auditors product are set. More specifically, the 2-byte data selection process is executed by using the value of the group determination number and the address of the special electric power operation number table as arguments. Then, as a result of the execution, the obtained higher 2-byte data is stored in the special winning opening opening time flag, and the lower 2-byte data obtained is stored in the special winning opening opening number buffer.

The above-mentioned "2-byte data selection process" is a process of acquiring the data (lower data) at the designated address of the RWM and the data (upper data) stored at the next address as 2-byte data. Here, the "2-byte data selection process" in the special electric auditors product setting process will be described in more detail. It is stored in an address moved by the group determination number (offset value) from the start address of the special electric operation number table (not shown). The value stored as the lower address and the upper address (F0H) and the previous lower address, and the data stored at the next address are the "number of times of opening the special winning opening" and "opening of the special winning opening", respectively. This is a process of storing a "special winning opening number of times" and a "special winning opening opening time flag" in a predetermined RWM storage area by "time flag" and "2-byte data selection process".
<Special symbol hit determination process>

Next, the special symbol winning determination process (see S199 in FIG. 24) described above will be described. In this special symbol hit determination process, after the transfer of the random number of the special symbol operation holding ball, the hit determination is performed.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Transfer of random number of special symbol operation hold sphere

In the transfer of the random number of the special symbol operation holding sphere described above, the random number stored in the special symbol 1 operation holding sphere or the special symbol 2 operation holding sphere (storage area) is determined, the stop symbol is determined, and the variation pattern In order to use in the determination of, the random numbers to be used next, random numbers to be used, symbol random numbers, variable pattern random numbers are transferred to the judgment area, and various random numbers to be used after the next one, so that each of the special symbol hold balls can be advanced in order. Perform random number transfer.
(1) Random number transfer to the judgment area

The address of the special symbol hit determination area is the random number transfer destination address. Then, the content indicated by the start address+table offset 0(0) of the special figure 2 (or 1) fluctuation start monitoring table stored in S182 and S185 is set as the lower address of the random number transfer source, and the RWM start upper address (0F0H) is transferred as the random number. The original upper address. The acquired random number transfer source address is sequentially transferred to the random number transfer destination address by the number of transfer bytes (6). Here, the data of the start address of the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table and the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table, "special figure 1 (2) address of operation reserve ball number 1 (lower)", is the first pending, that is, It is data showing the lower part of the address in which the random numbers to be used, the random numbers to be used, the random numbers to be used for the patterns, and the random numbers to be used for the fluctuation patterns are stored.
(2) Random number transfer between special symbol operation holding balls

The contents indicated by the input data base address + table offset 0 (0) (starting address of Toku-zu 1 (2) operation reserved ball number 1) are used as the lower address of the random number transfer destination, and the RWM starting upper address (0F0H) is transferred to the random number. It is the higher address. The acquired random number transfer destination address + 6 is used as a random number transfer source address, and the acquired random number transfer source address is sequentially transferred to the random number transfer destination address by updating the random number transfer destination and the random number transfer source address by 1 for each transfer byte number (18). To do.

Further, in order to clear the special symbol operation holding ball number 4 at 0, the address of the special symbol operation holding ball number 4 and the number of clear bytes (6) are used as arguments to execute the RWM clear processing. Details of this RWM clear processing will be described later. The address of the special symbol operation holding ball number 4 is the address of the special figure 1 operation holding ball 4 in the case of the special symbol 1, and the address of the special figure 2 operation holding ball 4 in the case of the special symbol 2.
2. Hit judgment

After performing the big hit determination and the small hit determination, the determination result of the random number per special symbol (hit determination data) is stored. If the big hit is judged as a big hit, the small hit is not judged.
(1) Big hit judgment

Acquires a big hit determination value corresponding to the value of the special symbol mode flag (value indicating whether the current determination target is special diagram 1 or special diagram 2), and determines the random number per special symbol, so the special symbol hit/miss The success/failure determination process is executed using the address of the determination table (FIG. 8A) and the success/failure random number as arguments. Then, as a result of the execution, if it is determined that the winning/discarding random number is included in the jackpot area, the winning/judging determination result is determined to be a jackpot.
(2) Small hit judgment

After the big hit determination, it is determined whether or not the random number is included in the small hit area of the hit determination table shown in FIG. 8A, and it is determined that the random number is included in the small hit area. Is determined to be a small hit.
(3) Storage of judgment result of random number per special symbol

The value corresponding to the determination result of the random number per special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination flag. The special symbol determination flag is "55H" at the time of a big hit, and "33H" at the time of a small hit.
<Design decision processing>

Next, the above-mentioned symbol determination processing (see S199 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this symbol determination process, in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol, the determination of the stop symbol corresponding to the hit determination result of the special symbol and the setting of the character effect are performed.

Each of these processes will be described below.
1. Confirmation of special pattern hit judgment result

If the value of the special symbol determination flag is the special symbol big hit data (55H), the result of the hit determination is determined to be a big hit, and if the special symbol small hit data (33H), the result of the hit determination is determined to be a small hit. In other cases, the result of the hit determination is judged to be off.
2. Result of special symbol hit judgment big hit

The big hit symbol is determined, the big hit symbol type is set, and the character effect is set.
(1) Determination of jackpot design

In order to determine the big hit symbol, the 2-byte address indicated by the input data base address (start address of the variation start monitoring table of Toku-zu 1 (or 2)) + table offset 1 (1) ) As an address of the big hit symbol control table (see FIGS. 28 and 29), the obtained special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control table (see FIGS. 28 and 29) and the value of the special symbol judgment area ( Byte data acquisition processing is executed with the upper byte of the pattern random number) as an argument. Details of this byte data acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control table and the obtained 1-byte data (address calculation value of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) symbol control table in FIG. 31) are added and calculated. The 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed using the lower byte of the address (special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control tables 1 to 4) and the value of the special symbol judgment area (random number of symbols) as an argument. Details of this 1-byte selection number acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the RWM base address (address of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) status) + the address of Toku-zu 1 (Toku-zu 2) number, which is the RWM offset 1 (1), in which the obtained selection number is input Stored as a design number.
(2) Setting the type of jackpot design

In order to set the type of the big hit symbol, the value obtained by subtracting the number data (2) of the special symbol “symbol 3” from the selection number acquired in the determination of the big hit symbol and the address of the special symbol group determination table (see FIG. 28) are argument. 1 byte selection number acquisition processing is executed. Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired selection number is stored in the group determination number.
(3) Character effect setting

In order to set the character effect, the probability variation function inspection process is executed, and as a result of the execution, the acquired special figure probability variation operation data is added to the doubled value of the acquired universal figure probability variation operation data. The value calculated by the formula “(group judgment number value×4)+1” is added to the addition result, and the RWM base address in which the addition result is input (address of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) status) +RWM offset 2 (2) is stored in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) character effect number.
3. Result of the special symbol hit judgment small hit

The small hit pattern is determined, the small hit pattern type is set, and the character effect is set.
(1) Determination of small hit design

In order to determine the small hit symbol, the byte data acquisition process is executed with the upper byte of the address of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30) and the value of the special symbol judgment area (random number of symbols) as an argument. Details of this byte data acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired small hit symbol control table and the acquired 1-byte data (calculated values of the small hit symbol control tables 1 to 4 in FIGS. 30 and 31) are added, and (the small hit symbol control table 1 (Address calculation value of 4) and a lower byte of the address calculated from a predetermined upper address and the value of the special symbol design determination area is used as an argument to execute a 1-byte selection number acquisition process. Details of this 1-byte selection number acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the RWM base address (address of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) status) + the address of Toku-zu 1 (Toku-zu 2) number, which is the RWM offset 1 (1), in which the obtained selection number is input Stored as a design number.
(2) Small hit design type setting

To set the type of the small hit symbol, the value obtained by subtracting the number data (2) of the special symbol "symbol 3" from the selection number acquired in the determination of the small hit symbol and the address of the special symbol group determination table (see FIG. 28) The 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed by using as an argument. Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired selection number is stored in the group determination number.

Here, the special symbol “symbol 3” means that it is a predetermined symbol out of many kinds of special symbols. For example, taking the special figure 1 as an example, in the present embodiment, as the special figure 1 number, the special symbol "symbol 1" to the special symbol "symbol 18", the special symbol "symbol 27" to the special symbol "symbol 35", 33 kinds of special symbols “symbol 44” to special symbols “symbol 49” are provided. This means that there are 33 types of special symbols according to Toku-zu 1.

Further, although illustration is omitted, "00H" to "11H" are assigned as data corresponding to the special symbol "symbol 18" to the special symbol "symbol 18" as the symbol number of the special symbol 1, and the special symbol "symbol 27". "1AH" to "22H" are assigned as data corresponding to the special symbol "symbol 35", and "2BH" is assigned as data corresponding to the special symbol "symbol 49" from the special symbol "symbol 44" "30H" is assigned.

In addition, in the present embodiment, with respect to the special symbols 1, the special symbol "symbol 3" to the special symbol "symbol 35" (excluding the "symbol 19" to "symbol 26" of the special symbol) are determined as a jackpot symbol. .. This means that the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 (see FIG. 28), the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 (see FIG. 29), the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 (see FIG. 29), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol described later. It corresponds to that the values calculated as a result of executing the 1-byte selection number acquisition process using Table 4 (see FIG. 29) are “00H” to “11H” “1AH” to “22H”. It is shown.

Regarding the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 9(a) to (d)) described above, the type of the special symbol has been simplified to 10 types from “0” to “9”, but strictly speaking, the above As described above, in this embodiment, about 50 kinds of special symbols are used. And, among these about 50 kinds, regarding special drawing 1, special design “design 1” to special design “design 18”, special design “design 27” to special design “design 35”, special design “design 44” 33 types of special symbols “design 49” are used.

The allocation of such special symbols and data is also performed for special figure 2 (special figure 2 number). Further, the "special figure 1 number" according to the above-mentioned special figure 1 and the "special figure 2 number" according to the special figure 2 are partially different in content (symbol number) and data. In addition, in the present embodiment, with respect to the special figure 2, it is defined that "design 19" to "design 26" and "design 36" to "design 43" which are not selected in the special diagram 1 can be selected.

This is the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 (see FIG. 29), the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 (see FIG. 29), the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 (see FIG. 30), the special figure 2 big hit symbol, which will be described later. This is shown in Table 4 (see FIG. 30).

Furthermore, regarding the small hitting design, in this embodiment, the special design "design 44" to the special design "design 49" are defined as the small winning design in common to the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. This is shown in a small hit symbol table 1, a small hit symbol table 2, a small hit symbol table 3, and a small hit symbol table 4 (see FIGS. 30 and 31), which will be described later.

In the description of the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9(c)) described above, the small hits are assigned to the special symbols “4” and “6”, but, for example, the above. The special symbol "symbol 44" and the special symbol "symbol 45" are shown in detail as the special symbol "4" in Fig. 9(c), and the special symbol "symbol 46" and the special symbol "symbol 48", The invention according to this embodiment can be understood by showing the special symbol “6” in FIG. 9C in detail.

Further, regarding the off symbol, in the present embodiment, as described above, two special symbols are assigned to the special figure 1 and one special symbol is assigned to the special figure 2 (FIG. 9(c)). reference). This means that the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 31 has a random number comparison value 1 and a random number comparison value 2 defined in the deviation symbol determination value table, and the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 31 has only a random number comparison value 1 in the deviation symbol determination value table. Corresponds to what is defined. The special symbols indicating the deviation are "symbol 1 (00H)" and "symbol 2 (01)H".
(3) Character effect setting

In order to set the character effect, the probability variation function inspection process is executed, and as a result of the execution, the acquired special figure probability variation operation data is added to the doubled value of the acquired universal figure probability variation operation data. A value calculated by the following calculation formula is added to the addition result, and the addition result is stored in the input RWM base address+RWM offset 2(2) and variable addition symbol information.
(Group judgment number value x 4) + 1
4. The result of the hit judgment of the special symbol is off

The off symbol is determined and the character effect is set.
(1) Defect pattern determination

To determine the off symbol, the special symbol “symbol 1” number data (0), the input data base address (the special address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) fluctuation start monitoring table) + table offset 4 (4) 2 bytes address (address of special figure 1 (special figure 2) deviation symbol determination value table) is calculated from the stored data and the data of the next address, and the calculated address and the value of the special symbol determination area (random number of symbols) ) As an argument, the selection number acquisition process (see FIG. 22) described above is executed. Then, as a result of the execution, the RWM base address (address of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) status) + the address of Toku-zu 1 (Toku-zu 2) number, which is the RWM offset 1 (1), in which the obtained selection number is input Stored as a design number.
(2) Character effect setting

In order to set the character effect, the character effect 0 data (0) is stored in the address of the special effect 1 (special figure 2) character effect number which is the input RWM base address+RWM offset 2(2).

FIG. 25 shows a flow chart of the symbol determination processing. In this symbol determination process, first, the address of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30) is set (S221). Further, the value of the special symbol determination flag is loaded as the hit determination data (S222), and it is determined whether or not the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223). If the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: YES), the processes of S23 to S241 described later are executed.

In S223 described above, if the hit determination data does not match the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: NO), the contents of the data base address+table offset 1 (1) are loaded as the big hit symbol control table address. (S224). The data base address in S224 is different between when the symbol determination according to Toku-zu 1 is performed and when the symbol determination according to Toku-zu 2 is performed. Then, by adding the content obtained by adding the table offset 1 (1) to the base address as the table address, the jackpot symbol control table (see FIGS. 28 and 29) according to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is set. To be done.

Then, it is determined whether or not the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H) (S225), and if they match (S225: YES), the processes of S231 to S241 described later are executed. However, in the above-mentioned S225, if the hit determination data does not match the special symbol big hit data (55H) (S225: NO), S226 to S230 (described later) that is the process in the case of falling out is executed. The processing in the case of the disconnection will be described below.

In S226 described above, the special symbol [symbol 1] number data (0) is set as the symbol selection number (S226). Further, the content of the data base address+table offset 4 (4) is loaded as the outlier symbol determination value table address (S227), and the value of the special symbol determination region (random number of symbols) is loaded as the random number data (S228). Then, the selection number acquisition process (see FIG. 22) is executed (S229), and the selection number is set as the stop symbol number (S230).

The above-described S226 is processing for clearing the data from the previous time. Further, in the deviation symbol determination value table used in S227 described above, as will be described later, the special symbol 1 deviation symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) and the special figure 2 deviation symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) However, by the time this symbol determination process is started, it is determined which of the special symbols 1 and 2 will be the symbol determination process. Therefore, in S227 described above, the special symbol deviating value table relating to the special symbol which has already been determined as the target of the special symbols 1 and 2 is used. Further, the above-described S228 is a process of calling the data of the symbol random number.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned S230, in the case of special figure 2, 0 which is a selection number is set as a stop symbol number. That is, as described above, as the symbol notice command relating to the deviation of the special figure 2, only one type of "first deviation" is provided (see FIG. 16(a)). Therefore, in the case of the deviation according to Toku-zu 2, only one type of value (here, 0) is set as the selection number in S230 described above.

On the other hand, in the case of the special drawing 1, the selection number 0 or 1 is set as the stop symbol number. As described above, as the symbol notice command relating to the deviation of the special figure 1, two types of "first deviation" and "second deviation" are provided (see FIG. 16(a)), but the notice effect determination The random number comparison value 12 for outputting the selection number 11 as the random number comparison value is “0026H” when determining the EVENT data relating to the symbol notice effect command in the process. On the other hand, in the symbol determination process, the random number comparison value for selecting "symbol 2 (second deviation)" using the special symbol 1 deviation symbol determination value table is also "0026H" (see FIG. 31). That is, when the stop symbol according to Toku-zu 1 is “symbol 2 (second deviation)”, 11 is always set as the selection number in the notice effect determination process for the symbol notice effect.

Here, the symbol 1 which is the outlier symbol specified by the selection number 0 represents the first outlier symbol (also referred to as the standard outlier symbol) corresponding to the "first outlier" of the winning symbol notice effect, and the symbol 2 Represents a second out-of-place design corresponding to "second out-of-place" (also referred to as non-standard out-of-place design, specific out-of-place design, or reach-only out-of-place design).

Subsequent to S230 described above, a process of storing the stop symbol number in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) number calculated by the RWM base address+RWM offset 1(1) is executed (S242). Then, a series of processes for determining the symbols in the case of the deviation is completed, and the process returns.

Next, a series of processes executed for the case of small hit and the case of big hit will be described. In the above S223, if the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: YES), or in the above S225, the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H). In the case of (S225: YES), in S231, the value of the address +1 of the special symbol determination area (the upper 1-byte data of the symbol random number) is loaded (S231), and the byte data acquisition process (S232) is executed. Details of the byte data acquisition process (S232) will be described later.

Then, as a lottery table address, special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control table (or small hit symbol control table) and 1 byte data addition result (address calculation value) are set (S233), special symbol judgment The value of the area address +0 (lower 1-byte data of the pattern random number) is loaded (S234). Further, the 1-byte selection number acquisition process (S235) is executed, and the selection number (initial value) is set to the stop symbol number (S236). Then, the address of the special symbol group determination table (see FIG. 28) is set (S237), and the stop symbol number is set as comparison data (S238). Details of the above-mentioned 1-byte selection number acquisition processing (S235) will be described later.

The processing from S231 to S236 described above is to determine the stop symbol (stop symbol number) from the symbol random number. Then, of these, in S231, the value of the upper 1 byte of the symbol random number is loaded. Further, in S233, the tables are switched using the 1-byte data relating to the symbol random number stored in the byte data acquisition process of S232. As a mode of switching the table by the process of S233, for example, switching from the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (135CH) to the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 (1360H=135CH+04H) by the address calculation value "04H", etc. It can be illustrated. Further, in the processing from S234 to S236, the lower 1-byte data of the symbol random number is called in S234, and the stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined by the 1-byte data in S235 and S236.

Then, the special symbol "symbol 3" number data (2) is subtracted from the comparison data (S239), and the 1-byte selection number acquisition process (S240) is executed. Details of this 1-byte selection number acquisition processing (S235) will be described later. Further, the selection number is stored in the group determination number (S241), and the stop symbol number is stored in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) number calculated by the RWM base address+RWM offset 1 (1) (S242), To return.

Here, the processing from S237 to S241 described above is processing for calculating the group determination number corresponding to the type of big hit from the stop symbol (number) and the table. Further, if the hit determination data in S223 described above does not match the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: NO), or the hit determination data in S225 described above matches the special symbol big hit data (55H). If not (S225: NO), the above-mentioned S230 is executed, and then the above-mentioned S242 is executed.
<Byte data acquisition process>

Next, the above-mentioned byte data acquisition processing (see S232 in FIG. 25) will be described. In this byte data acquisition process, the input offset is added to the input base address, and the result is set to the base address. Also, the contents of the set base address are stored as 1-byte data. This byte data acquisition process is also called in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) in the game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13) described above.

In the byte data acquisition process (S232) at the time of a big hit (S225: YES) in the above-described symbol determination process (see FIG. 25), the high-order 1-byte data (0-3) of the symbol random number (0-999) is input. The added base address (special figure 1 (special figure 2) head address of the big hit symbol control table) is added to obtain the addresses storing the calculated values of the big hit symbol control tables 1 to 4.
<1 byte selection number acquisition process>

Next, the above-mentioned 1-byte selection number acquisition processing (see S235 in FIG. 25) will be described. In the 1-byte selection number acquisition process, the selection number corresponding to the input comparison data is determined from the input drawing table. Further, the number setting value is acquired from the inputted lottery table, and the non-places indicated by the inputted lottery table are sequentially subtracted from the inputted comparison data. When the subtraction result is 0 or more, the number setting value is incremented by 1, and when the subtraction result is less than 0, the calculated number setting value is output as the selection number and the process ends. Whereas the selection number acquisition process is based on 2-byte data, this is a process for acquiring the selection number from 1-byte data.

FIG. 26 shows a flowchart of the 1-byte selection number acquisition process. In the 1-byte selection number acquisition process, first, the content of the drawing table address is loaded as the selection number (S251). Further, the lottery table address is incremented by 1 (S252), and the contents of the lottery table address are subtracted from the comparison data (S253). Then, when the subtraction result in S253 is not less than 0 (S253: NO), the selection number is incremented by 1 (S254), and the process of S252 described above is executed again. Further, when the subtraction result in S253 described above is less than 0 (S253: YES), the process returns. The 1-byte selection number acquisition process is also called in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) in the game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13).
<Time saving process>

Next, the time saving determination process (see S208 of FIG. 24) described above will be described. In this time saving process, in order to set the game state after the jackpot, the offset used to set the game state is obtained, the number of times the variable time reduction function of the special symbol display device is activated, and the probability of the ordinary symbol display device. Set the contents of the time-saving game, such as the operation of the fluctuation function.
<Variation pattern mode setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern mode setting process (see S210 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this variation pattern mode setting process, the contents of the variation pattern selection state after the big hit or after the small hit, the variation pattern selection state at the end of the time saving game, and the variation pattern selection state at the time of switching the limited frequency pattern are set. To do.

The variation pattern mode setting process is to set a mode related to the variation pattern, and the determination of the variation pattern is based on the mode set in the variation pattern mode setting process, and the above-mentioned game progress interrupt process (FIG. 13)) in the special symbol control process (S57).
<Demo production time setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned demonstration effect time setting process (see S211 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this demonstration effect time setting process, the time value used to set the demo EVENT data to be transmitted to the sub-main board 301 and the demo display time on the main board 102 is stored.
<RWM clear processing>

Next, the aforementioned RWM clearing process (see S214 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this RWM clear processing, the RWMs corresponding to the number of input clear bytes are sequentially cleared to 0 from the input RWM address.
<Variation time determination process>

Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown, a variable time determination process as described below is executed. This fluctuation time determination process is carried out by the sub-module of the special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) described above. More specifically, the special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) calls the special symbol control general-purpose process (not shown), and the special symbol control general-purpose process calls the special symbol variation start process (not shown). The special symbol variation start process is designed to call the variation time determination process.

In the special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) described above, if the accessory operation is not in progress, the statuses of the special symbols 1 and 2 are confirmed, and the special symbol control general-purpose process is called. Furthermore, in the special symbol control general-purpose process, for each status of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) that is the processing target at that time, it is a sub-module, special symbol variation start process, special symbol variation process, special One of the symbol stop symbol changing process is called.

In the above-mentioned special symbol variation start processing, the variation pattern table to be used is determined according to the hit determination data (big hit (=55H), small hit (=33H), deviating symbol). At this time, when the hit determination data is out-of-range data, after setting a normal out-of-range table (standard out-of-range table), whether or not the stop symbol of this time is "symbol 1 (second deviant symbol)" To judge. Then, when the stop symbol of this time is “symbol 1”, the offset value is added to the referred table address, and the reach selection frequency is high (almost 100% or equivalent to the variation pattern table at the time of big hit). The process of switching to the second variation pattern table for non-standard deviation (nonstandard deviation table) is executed.

Further, when the variation pattern is determined, the variation time determination process described above is performed, and the variation time data is determined using the 2-byte data selection process based on the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern table set. ..
<Various tables used on the main board for prefetching>

Next, various processing tables used on the main board 102 for the above-described look-ahead effect will be described.
<Starting port 1 monitoring table>

FIG. 27 shows the starting port 1 monitoring table. This starting port 1 monitoring table is used in the aforementioned starting port monitoring control process (see FIG. 17). The address of the starting port 1 monitoring table is "1124H" and the total area is "9".

Further, the contents of the starting port 1 monitoring table include the starting port 1 switch bit data, the address of the Toku-zu 1 operation holding ball number (lower), the address of the Toku-zu 1 random number transfer table (lower), and the Toku-zu 1 random number transfer table. Address (upper), address of RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (lower), special symbol 1 operation data, address of winning symbol notice determination value table 1 (lower), address of winning symbol notice determination value table 1 (upper), It is EVENT (winning symbol notice effect 0). Then, as shown in the figure, data relating to these contents is defined in the starting port 1 monitoring table,
<Starting port 2 monitoring table>

Similarly, FIG. 27 shows a starting port 2 monitoring table. This starting port 2 monitoring table is used in the above-described starting port monitoring control process (see FIG. 17). The address of the starting port 2 monitoring table is "112DH", and the total area is "9".

Further, the contents of the starting port 2 monitoring table include the starting port 2 switch bit data, the address of the special figure 2 operation-holding ball number (lower), the address of the special figure 2 random number transfer table (lower), and the special figure 2 random number transfer table. Address (upper), RL0 hard latch random number register 1 address (lower), special symbol 2 operation data, winning symbol notice determination value table 2 address (lower), winning symbol notice determination value table 2 address (upper), It is EVENT (winning symbol notice effect 0). Then, in the starting port 2 monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special map 1 fluctuation start monitoring table>

Similarly, FIG. 27 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table. This special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table is used in the aforementioned special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (see FIG. 23). The address of the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table is "129BDH", and the total area is "6".

Furthermore, the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table, the address of the special figure 1 operation holding ball number 1 (lower), the address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28) (lower), the special figure 1 big hit symbol Address (upper) of the control table (see FIG. 28), special symbol 1 operation data, special figure 1 deviation symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) address (lower), special figure 1 deviation symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) ) Address (upper). Then, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table>

Similarly, FIG. 27 shows a special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table. This special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table is used in the aforementioned special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (see FIG. 23). The address of the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table is "12A1H", and the total area is "6".

Further, the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table, the address of the special figure 2 operation holding ball number 1 (lower), the address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29) (lower), the special figure 2 big hit symbol Address (upper) of the control table (see FIG. 29), special symbol 2 operation data, address (lower) of special symbol 2 deviation symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31), special symbol 2 deviation symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) ) Address (upper). Then, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special symbol group determination table>

In FIG. 28, a special symbol group determination table is shown. This special symbol group determination table is used in the above-described symbol determination process (see FIG. 25). The address of this special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table is "12C5H", and the total area is "19". Further, the contents of the special symbol group determination table are 16R specific time shortened symbol 1 data, symbol number comparison value 1 to symbol number comparison value 18. Then, in this special symbol group determination table, as shown in the figure, data relating to the above-mentioned contents is defined.
<Game state frequency setting table>

Similarly, in FIG. 28, a game state number setting table is shown. This game state count setting table is used in the above-mentioned time saving count determination process (not shown). The address of this game state number setting table is "1327H", and the total area is "9".

Further, the contents of the game state number setting table include the easy winning state 0 times data, the easy winning state 20 times data, the easy winning state 40 times data, the easy winning state 60 times data, the easy winning state data until the next time, and the time saving 20 times data. 40 hours/hour data, 60 hours/hour data, and data up to next time/hour. Then, in the game state number setting table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.

In addition, here, a game state number setting table for setting the number of time saving (time saving period) to any one of 20, 40, 60 times and the next big hit depending on the type of big hit that has occurred is shown. .. In addition, the game state number setting table is capable of providing a specific game state (state of a prize winning period) in which only the prize winning easy state described above is provided without a reduction in time, and the prize winning easy period is It is either 0 times, 20 times, 40 times, 60 times, or until the next big hit.
<Special map 1 big hit symbol control table>

Similarly, in FIG. 28, the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is shown. This special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is used for determining the big hit symbol according to special figure 1 in the above-described symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). Further, the address of this special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is a part of the contents of the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27). The address of this special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is "1330H", and the total area is "4". Further, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table are the address calculation values of the special figure 1 big hit symbol tables 1 to 4 (see FIGS. 28 and 29). And, in this special figure 1 big hit design control table, as shown in the figure, the data which relates to each contents above is defined.
<Special drawing 1 jackpot design table 1>

Similarly, in FIG. 28, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 is a part of the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 is "1334H", and the total area is "7". Further, the contents of the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table 1 are special symbol "symbol 3" number data and random number comparison values 1 to 6. And, in this special figure 1 big hit design table 1, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-mentioned contents is defined.
<Special drawing 1 jackpot design table 2>

29, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table 2 is shown. The calculated address value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 is a part of the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 is "133BH", and the total area is "4". Further, the contents of the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table 2 are special symbol “symbol 8” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 3. Then, in the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special drawing 1 big hit design table 3>

Similarly, in FIG. 29, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 is shown. The calculated address value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 is a part of the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 is "133FH", and the total area is "19". Further, the contents of the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table 3 are special symbol "symbol 10" number data and random number comparison values 1 to 18. Then, in the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.

The data used as the random number comparison value has "00H", but when it is "00H", it indicates that the area is not determined as the selection number in the selection number acquisition processing described above. <Special map 1 big hit design table 4>

Similarly, in FIG. 29, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4 is a part of the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4 is "1352H", and the total area is "10". Further, the contents of the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table 4 are the special symbol “symbol 27” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 9. Then, in the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 big hit symbol control table>

Similarly, in FIG. 29, the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is shown. This special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is used for the determination of the big hit symbol according to special figure 2 in the above-mentioned symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). Further, the address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is a part of the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27). The address of this special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is "135CH", and the total area is "4". Further, the contents of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table are the address calculation values of the special figure 2 big hit symbol tables 1 to 4 (see FIGS. 29 and 30). And, in this special figure 2 big hit design control table, as shown in the figure, the data which relates to the above-mentioned each contents is stipulated.
<Special drawing 2 big hit design table 1>

Similarly, in FIG. 29, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 is a part of the contents of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 is "1360H", and the total area is "3". Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 1 are special symbol "symbol 3" number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 jackpot design table 2>

Similarly, in FIG. 29, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 is a part of the contents of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 is "1363H", and the total area is "8". Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 2 are special symbol “symbol 4” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 7. And, in this special figure 2 big hit design table 2, as shown in the figure, the data which relates to the above-mentioned each contents is stipulated.
<Special drawing 2 big hit design table 3>

In FIG. 30, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 is a part of the contents of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 is "136BH", and the total area is "16". Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 3 are special symbol “symbol 10” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 15. Then, in the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Special map 2 Big hit symbol table 4>

Similarly, in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4 is a part of the contents of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4 is "137BH", and the total area is "20". Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 4 are special symbol “symbol 25” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 19. Then, in the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Small hit symbol control table>

Similarly, in FIG. 30, a small hit symbol control table is shown. This small hit symbol control table is used to determine the small hit symbol in the above-described symbol determination process (see FIG. 25). The address of this small hit symbol control table is "138FH", and the total area is "4". Furthermore, the contents of the small hit symbol control table are the address calculation values of the small hit symbol tables 1 to 4 (see FIGS. 30 and 31). Then, in this small hitting symbol control table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Small hits design table 1>

Similarly, in FIG. 30, the small hit symbol table 1 is shown. The address calculation value of the small hit symbol table 1 is a part of the contents of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 1 is "1393H", and the total area is "3". Further, the contents of the small hit symbol table 1 are special symbol “symbol 44” number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the small hit symbol table 1, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Small hits design table 2>

Similarly, in FIG. 30, the small hit symbol table 2 is shown. The address calculation value of the small hit symbol table 2 is a part of the contents of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 2 is "1396H", and the total area is "3". Further, the contents of the small hit symbol table 2 are special symbol "symbol 45" number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the small hit symbol table 2, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is determined.
<Small hits design table 3>

In FIG. 31, the small hit symbol table 3 is shown. The address calculation value of this small hitting symbol table 3 is a part of the contents of the aforementioned small hitting symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 3 is "1399H", and the total area is "4". Furthermore, the contents of the small hit symbol table 3 are special symbol “symbol 46” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 3. Then, in the small hit symbol table 3, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Small hits design table 4>

Similarly, in FIG. 31, the small hit symbol table 4 is shown. The address calculation value of this small hitting symbol table 4 is a part of the contents of the aforementioned small hitting symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 4 is "139DH", and the total area is "3". Further, the contents of the small hit symbol table 4 are special symbol "symbol 48" number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the small hit symbol table 4, as shown in the drawing, data relating to the above-mentioned contents is determined.
<Special figure 1 deficit symbol judgment value table>

Similarly, in FIG. 31, the special figure 1 shows the deviation symbol determination value table. This special figure 1 deviation symbol determination value table is used to determine the deviation symbol according to special figure 1 in the symbol determination process (see FIG. 25). The address of the special symbol 1 deviation symbol determination value table is "13A0H", and the total area is "4". Further, the contents of the special symbol 1 deviation symbol determination value table are the lower (byte) and the upper (byte) of the random number comparison values 1 and 2. And, as shown in the drawing, the data relating to each of the above contents is defined in the deviation symbol determination value table of this special figure 1.
<Special figure 2 outlier symbol judgment value table>

Similarly, in FIG. 31, the special figure 2 shows a deviation symbol determination value table. This special figure 2 deviation symbol determination value table is used to determine the deviation symbol according to special figure 2 in the above-described symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). The address of the special symbol 2 deviation symbol determination value table is "13A4H", and the total area is "2". Furthermore, the contents of the special symbol 2 deviation symbol determination value table are the lower (byte) of the random number comparison value 1 and the upper (byte) of the random number comparison value 1. Then, in this special figure 2 deviation symbol determination value table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Hit notice judgment value table>

Similarly, FIG. 31 shows a hit announcement determination value table. This winning advance notice determination value table is used for determining the winning advance notice effect in the above-described starting opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19). Then, the address of the hit announcement determination value table is "13A6H", and the total area is "10". Furthermore, the contents of the hit announcement determination value table are the lower (byte) and upper (byte) of the random number comparison values 1 to 5. Then, as shown in the figure, the data relating to the above-mentioned contents are defined in the hit announcement determination value table.
<Hit symbol notice judgment value table>

Similarly, in FIG. 31, a winning symbol notice determination value table (hit symbol notice determination value table 1) is shown. This winning symbol notice determination value table is used for determining the winning symbol notice effect in the above-described starting opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19). The address of this winning symbol notice determination value table is "13B0H", and the total area is "24". Further, the contents of the winning symbol notice determination value table are lower (byte) and higher (byte) of the random number comparison values 1 to 12. Then, in the hit symbol notice determination value table, as shown in the figure, data relating to the above-mentioned contents is defined.

Here, in the present embodiment, the number of types of information that can be selected by the above-mentioned winning symbol notice determination value table (here, 12) is the number of types of information that can be selected by the above-mentioned special figure 1 symbol determination value table. (Here 2). Further, as described above, the symbol random number is “0 to 999”, and the same number of random numbers (symbol random number) is used for both the winning symbol and the deviating symbol (FIG. 9(a), (a)). b), (d)).
<Relationship between the numerical range at the time of determining the symbol relating to the second deviation and the numerical range at the time of the notice effect determination relating to the second deviation>

Next, regarding the symbol determination process using the same symbol random number and the notice effect determination process of the winning symbol notice effect, the number range at the time of the symbol determination process related to the above-mentioned second deviation and the notice effect determination time related to the second deviation The relationship with the numerical range of will be described. In the present embodiment, the numerical range of the symbol random number relating to the case of determining the second deviation in the symbol determination process is “962 to 999” as described above (FIG. 9(d), FIG. 31). (See "0026H" which is the random number comparison value 2 of the "special figure 1 deviation symbol determination value table"). Furthermore, in the notice effect determination process (S134) for the symbol random numbers executed in the above-described starting opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19), random number comparison determined in the winning symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31). The value of 12 is a random number range of "002
6H”, the symbol random numbers “962 to 999” are assigned, and the selection number “11H” is determined as EVENT data for the symbol random numbers belonging to this numerical range.

In the symbol determination process, the special figure 1 has two types of data selected in the deviation determination value table. On the other hand, there are 12 types of data selected by the notice effect determination process of the winning symbol notice effect, which is the process of determining using the same symbol random number, and the number of types that can be selected is larger than that at the time of determining the outlier symbol. Has become. The reason why the number of types that can be selected is larger than the outlier symbol is that the hit symbol notice determination value table used in the notice effect determination process for the type of big hit in the case of a big hit and the effect type determined by the sub-main board This is because it was subdivided.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the total of the numerical range of the symbol random numbers relating to the second deviation and the numerical range of the plurality of random number comparison values defined in the winning symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31). May be made to coincide with each other, or the total of the numerical range of the symbol random numbers relating to the second deviation and the numerical range of the symbol random numbers relating to the third to N-th deviations, the winning symbol notice determination value table (FIG. 31) It may be made to agree with the numeral range of the random number comparison value of 1 defined in (see). In addition, the numerical range of the symbol random numbers related to the second deviation matches the numerical range of the random number comparison value of 1 in the symbol notice determination value table, and the third numerical range of the symbol random numbers related to the third deviation, You may make it the numerical value range of the other 1 random number comparison value of a symbol notice determination value table correspond.

Further, in the present embodiment, the types of disengagement relating to the symbol notice are only the first disengagement and the second disengagement, but the invention is not limited to this, and the third disposition and the fourth disengagement are provided. The EVENT command in these symbol notice commands may be made common (coincident) with the EVENT command in the symbol notice command of low profit jackpot (for example, 4R normal other than 4R normal 3).
<Processing on the sub-main board side based on the advance notice command from the main board>

When various notice commands are transmitted to the sub main board 301 by the processing on the main board 102 side as described above, the sub main board 301 performs the following processing. That is, when a new hold occurs, the above-mentioned various advance notice commands (hit notice effect command, hit symbol notice effect command, pattern notice effect command) are added to the starting opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) on the main board 102. (Advance information such as) is created and these commands are transmitted from the main board 102, the sub-main board 301 receives these various kinds of advance notification commands.

In the sub-main board 301, using various received advance notice commands (preliminary information), items such as whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect (pre-effect) such as a hold change, and an effect when performing the pre-effect are described. The type etc. is decided by drawing lottery etc. at various timings such as when winning a prize or when holding is held. Further, in the sub-main board 301, when the EVENT command receives a winning symbol notice effect command having a predetermined value (here, 0BH corresponding to the second deviation), an effect higher than the super reach described above is obtained. Perform a suggested pre-production. At this time, the sub-main substrate 301 uses a predetermined look-ahead effect pattern table in which only the look-ahead effect that suggests an effect of super reach or above is determined regardless of the hit notice effect command and the pattern notice effect command. The prefetch effect pattern to be executed is determined.

When the sub-main board 301 performs the above-described processing for determining the look-ahead effect, when the sub-main board 301 receives the winning symbol notice effect command, the analysis of the hit notice effect command or the pattern notice effect command is performed. Before, it is possible to analyze the winning symbol notice effect command. When the EVENT data of the winning symbol notice effect command is not a predetermined value (here, 0BH), the hit notice effect command or the pattern notice effect command is analyzed, and the hit notice effect command or the pattern notice effect command is executed. The look-ahead effect lottery pattern table to be used is determined with reference to the table.

However, when the EVENT data of the winning symbol notice production command is a predetermined value (here, 0BH), the winning notice production command or the pattern notice production command is not analyzed, and these commands are not referred to, It is conceivable that the look-ahead effect pattern is determined using a predetermined look-ahead effect pattern table in which only the look-ahead effects that suggest effects beyond the super reach are determined.

By doing this, when a predetermined winning symbol notice effect command is received, regardless of whether the hit notice command or the pattern notice effect command corresponds to a hit or a hit , The look-ahead effect that suggests an effect higher than the super reach will always be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the EVENT data of the winning symbol notice effect command received by the sub-main board 301 is the predetermined value (here, 0BH) related to the second deviation, The pre-reading effect is limited. And as the contents of this restriction, as described above, only the pending change of red color is executed, and the pending change that can give the impression that a big hit such as gold or rainbow color is confirmed is not executed. Can be illustrated. By providing such a limitation on the prefetching effect, it is possible to easily balance the content of the prefetching effect and the content of the profit of the big hit. Note that the predetermined winning symbol notice effect command (0BH) is a random number range of symbols that results in a low profit and a large hit even if the result of the hit determination is a hit, so by setting the above-mentioned limit, the change in the hold of the winning decision can be changed. It is also possible to prevent the player from being disappointed because of the low profitability.

In addition, when the sub-main substrate 301 receives a command related to the second deviation, a presentation display suggesting that the pre-reading effect is to develop into the reach effect of the content provided specifically for the second deviation or the low-profit big hit. It is possible to perform the effect display up to the variation up to the variation (variation information). A plurality of types of the suggestion effect display and the reach effect of the content provided only for the second outlier may be provided as selection patterns.

Further, when the sub-main board 301 receives a command relating to the second outlier, it may be decided to execute the prefetching effect at the time of the start winning, and the decided prefetching effect may be executed without fail. In this case, the prefetch effect determined before that may be canceled. It should be noted that, as the prefetching effect, the above-mentioned hold notice or continuous notice can be exemplified, but it is also possible to execute the change of the effect mode as described above as the prefetching effect (preliminary notification effect). In addition, after the change of the hold with respect to the pre-reading effect that has been executed first is finished, if the hold related to the second deviation is determined as the pre-reading target, the second deviation pre-reading effect may be selected by lottery. In such a case, if there is a hit hold or the like ahead of time, it is possible to prioritize read ahead for the hit hold.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main board 102 creates various advance notice commands as described above and transmits them to the sub-main board 301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board acquires them, for example. The random number value is transmitted as it is as the information (raw information), and the determination of the random number range such as the selection number acquisition process (see FIG. 22) described above and the notice effect determination process are performed by the sub-main board 301. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-main board 301 side receives the symbol notice command, determines whether or not to carry out the prefetch effect such as a pending change using the received symbol notice command, and determines the type of the prefetch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Then, for example, when the reserved storage information of the special symbol occurs on the main board 102, the generated reserved storage information is received by the sub-main board 301 as a command from the main board 102, and the received information such as the acquired random number value is received. Based on the above, winning notice information, winning notice information, pattern notice information, and the like may be created and stored. Then, in this case, the sub-main board 301 may determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect and determine the type of the prefetching effect by using the hit announcement information and the hit symbol announcement information that have been created and stored. Good.

Then, as one invention, the main substrate 102 (or the main CPU 501) transmits the symbol notice information (symbol notice effect command) to the sub-main substrate 301 in the starting opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19). 21 is executed, the sub-main substrate 301 (or the sub-main CPU 521) receives the symbol notice information, and uses the received symbol notice information for the pre-effect (pre-reading effect or the like). Whether or not to carry out or decide the type of pre-production, as the symbol notice information, when the symbol determination process (see FIG. 25) in the main board 102 (or main CPU 501), the special symbol random number (symbol random number, etc.) is out of the second range. When the specific EVENT command determined in the notice effect determination process is received when the random number value that determines is, the advance effect can be executed without fail.

Further, as another invention, in the production control command, jackpot random number information related to the obtained jackpot random number, special symbol random number information related to the obtained special symbol random number, variation pattern random number information related to the obtained variation pattern random number, Including, the sub-main board 301 (or sub-main CPU 521), the game ball has passed through the starting opening (starting opening 1 or 2), when the special symbol reservation storage information occurs in the main board 102, the special occurred Receive the design hold storage information as a production control command, execute a process for creating and storing predetermined design notice information based on the received special design reserve storage information, and use the stored design notice information for pre-production ( Whether or not the pre-reading effect) is carried out and the type of pre-effect is determined, and the symbol notice information is created using a symbol notice determination value table (such as a hit symbol notice determination value table 1 incorporating FIG. 31), In the symbol notice determination value table, the relationship between the special symbol random number and the symbol notice information (the symbol notice associated with the random number range of the symbol random numbers that can be obtained by the value of the data and the random number comparison values 1 to 12) The relationship with the production command) is defined, and in the symbol notice determination value table, the value of the range corresponding to the special symbol of the second deviation (special figure 1 using FIG. 31 is referred to as the deviation symbol determination value table). The value in the range of 0026H determined by the random number comparison value 2) is a range of the second deviation of the symbol determination value table used in the symbol determination processing of the main control means (hit symbol notice determination value table). It is possible to match with a value belonging to a random number comparison value 12 of 1 (such as a range of 0026H).
<Advantageous effects of the invention according to this embodiment>

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the type of the detachment symbol, the above-described second detachment symbol (reach-only detachment symbol) is provided. Then, the symbol notice command relating to the second deviation is a symbol notice command relating to a predetermined type of big hit (low profit big hit) in the big hit, and the EVENT command is common (matches with 0BH). .. Then, in the sub-main board 301 that has received the commonized EVENT command (0BH), based on the fact that the EVENT command is "0BH", a pre-read advance notice effect that suggests a reach effect of a predetermined rank or higher is executed.

Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the process for determining the prefetch effect pattern on the sub-main board 301 side without confirming the result of the win/no win lottery. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to make a simple determination based on only the symbol notice command to perform the prefetching effect corresponding to the effect of super reach or more.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect can be determined based on more information by referring to the hit announcement effect command or the pattern announcement effect command. Then, in this case, the number of combinations of information that can be referred to can be increased, and diversification of the prefetching effect is possible, compared to the case where the effect pattern of the prefetching effect is determined based only on the symbol notice command. Becomes

Further, also on the main board 102, it is possible to create information (advance determination information) related to advance determination that is common to the deviation and the big hit by the symbol random numbers, without referring to the information related to the result of the win/loss. ..

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined value (0BH) is received as the EVENT command of the symbol notice command, the prefetch effect is limited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to easily balance the content of the prefetching effect with the content of the profit of the big hit, and it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player when the big hit with the small profit is acquired.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, but can be variously modified. For example, as described above, when the one using a plurality of liquid crystal displays or the like is adopted as the effect display device 60, the effect pattern 190 is displayed on a predetermined display device, and the other display device is displayed. It is possible to display the 1-holding number display unit 196, the second holding number display unit 197, and the like. It is also possible to move the display target (character, effect design, hold number display unit, etc.) between the screens of a plurality of display devices.

Also, when it is judged as a big hit in the judgment of big hit, big hit pattern, presence or absence of probability change, presence or absence of time saving, presence or absence of extension extension of ordinary electric auditors, various start demonstration start time, various end demo time, special electric auditors' object It is possible to determine the operation pattern and the like, and refer to the result, not at once, but separately at various timings as necessary in various control processes that require this information.

Also, after the start of the special game, for example, when the game ball has passed a specific area, whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a reduction in time, whether or not the extended extension of the ordinary electric auditors, the operation pattern of the special electric auditors, etc. In the pachinko game machine of the type that determines at least one of them (also called "Tamakoshi spec" etc.), for example, the time required for the big hit end demo depends on the game state such as whether it is a positive change or a non-positive change (normal). If it is determined to be a big hit, it is possible to execute the big hit end demo at the time according to the determined game state at the start of the big hit end demo.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fact that it is not a big hit, the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is waiting for variation, and the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol that is the variation start target is 0. Other than that, it is a condition for the start of fluctuation, further, the second game using the second start winning port 63 is prioritized over the first game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a configuration that prioritizes the first game, or a configuration that consumes the reserved memory in the order in which the start winning occurs and is reserved, rather than prioritizing any game It is also possible to adopt. Among these, in the latter type that changes symbols in the winning order, in addition to the above-mentioned variation start conditions, for example, it is confirmed that the order of the success/failure determination and the order of winning (winning order) match. It is possible to make it one of the fluctuation start conditions that it has been confirmed.

Furthermore, in the type in which the symbol variations of the first game and the second game are performed in the winning order as described above, when one game is winning, it may be possible not to judge whether the other game is winning or failing. It is possible. Here, as a mode in which the other game is not judged whether or not to win, until the game of the big hit of the previously won game is over, a mode in which the subsequent game is not judged whether to win or fail, or the starting winning of the subsequent game, for example, It is conceivable to invalidate the hit/no decision. That is, like these various modes, it is possible to appropriately set the condition for starting the fluctuation of the symbols, depending on the circumstances such as the content of the game when a plurality of starting openings are used.

Further, it is possible to set an appropriate mode for the order of storing the game state after the operation of the above-mentioned condition device is completed. For example, it is possible to set the probability variation of the special symbol, the opening extension function, the opening pattern of the special electric auditors, the selection state of the variation pattern (including the limited frequency pattern), the start demo time, and the end demo time. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display request for the standby demo is made on the main board 102 and the customer waiting demo command is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. As a mode, at the end of the big hit (at the end of the end demo), or when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the timer is set and clocked at a predetermined timing, and the timer is subtracted during the fluctuation waiting of the special symbol, and the timer value When the value becomes 0, it is possible to send the command of the standby demo. Further, the standby demo command may be transmitted to the sub-main board 301 only when there is no reserved storage of the special symbol. In this way, with respect to the command transmission of the standby demonstration, it is possible to change the presence or absence of command transmission depending on whether the big hit end or the fluctuation stop of the symbol is used as a time reference or the number of reserved balls. Further, the customer waiting demo command is not transmitted/received from the main board 102, for example, the timer measurement is performed after the fluctuation stop command is received by the sub main board 301, and the control for displaying the customer waiting demo is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding the soft random number to the built-in random number is used as the winning/discarding random number to be used in the big hit judgment, but the use condition of the winning/discarding random number composed of the built-in random number and the soft random number is changed depending on the game situation. It is also possible to determine. For example, if there is a starting mouth prize and it is determined that the number of holding balls at that time has not reached the maximum value, a winning/deciding random number composed of a built-in random number and a soft random number is used for the judging of winning/deciding, and the holding at that time is held. When the number of spheres has reached the maximum value, it is possible to use, for example, only soft random numbers (or only built-in random numbers) as the success/failure random numbers. In addition, in the present embodiment, the storage of the obtained various random numbers is performed for the pass/fail random numbers, the pattern random numbers, and the fluctuation pattern random numbers, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, depending on the presence or absence of the look-ahead rendering function. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the random number of the variation pattern is not stored according to need.

Further, if the control process relating to the start winning in the first game and the second game is taken as an example, the basic configuration of the control process can be the same although there is a difference in the control content based on the different game. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the control program, the use storage area of the RWM 503 is offset to be different, and other program contents are shared in many parts, so that the first game and the second game It is in control. By doing so, the storage capacity of the program can be reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control modules may be created separately as completely different processing. In this case, the speed of control processing can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the priority of the symbol variation of the first game and the second game is determined, in the monitoring of the operating state of the special symbol, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Is confirming whether or not it is on standby. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine of the type that can change the special symbols of the first game and the second game at the same time in parallel, the first game and the first game. 2 Regarding the variation of the symbols of the game, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the variation is on standby. In this case, it is desirable that the special symbols of the first game and the second game be separately created so that the special symbols can be changed independently of each other.

Further, in the game area 52, parts such as the first start winning opening 62, the second starting winning opening 63, the first big winning opening 91, the second big winning opening 92, the left operating opening 68a, and the right operating opening 68b. The arrangement is determined according to the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 10. Then, in the present embodiment, the arrangement as described above (see FIG. 1) is adopted, but when the game characteristics are different, for example, the second start winning opening 63 is set in the game area 52. It is also possible to arrange it on the right side and above the second special winning opening 92. Further, in this case, the second starting winning opening 63 is of a type having only one blade (single blade), or an opening/closing plate that horizontally moves forward and backward without being a blade type. It is possible to use a built-in type or a fallen door type (attacker type) type. Further, it is possible to provide only one special winning opening (the second special winning opening 92 in the figure) without providing the first special winning opening 91.
<Second embodiment of the invention relating to control processing of main board when power is off>

Next, a second embodiment of the invention relating to the control processing of the main board when the power is cut off will be described with reference to the drawings. The same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, when a power failure signal is input to the non-maskable interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 501 mounted on the main board 102, the CPU 501 finishes a predetermined control process and finally the supply voltage. Is looped until the voltage falls below the operable voltage, and these points are common to the above-described embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, a characteristic control process is included from the input of the power interruption signal to the non-maskable interrupt terminal of the CPU 501 to the loop process.

That is, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment is the control start processing (including the power-off processing) shown in FIG. 11 (diverting the drawing according to the first embodiment described above) and FIG. 32, These are the game progress interrupt processing and the processing for setting the power-off confirmation information shown in FIG. 13 that are diverted in the same manner as in FIG.

In the control start processing shown in FIGS. 11 and 32, after the settings (S1 to S4) required when the power is turned on are executed, the operation state (S5) of the initialization switch 544 and the power interruption status confirmation processing (S6 to S8) In accordance with the value of the power-off information flag in R, and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, the process at power-off recovery (S9 to S17), the process at RWM initialization (S24 to S26), the game The process of time setting for progress interruption (S27), the circulation process (S33 (S28 to S32)), the process of setting power cut confirmation information (S301 to S307), etc. are executed.

Of these processes, each process of S1 to S29 is almost the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, but the process (S9 to S17) at the time of power interruption recovery functions as a restart preparation process, and after this , Is different from the above-described embodiment in that the process proceeds to the process of setting the time for game progress interruption (S27). Further, after the processing (S29) of setting a predetermined value as the first recursive information in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register, it is determined by the power-off confirmation information determination processing whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set. (S30), if it is set (S30: Yes), it is also different from the above-described embodiment in that the process proceeds to the power-off process (S301 to S307) described later. Note that S31 (initial value random number update processing) and S32 (interruption permission processing) in FIG. 32 correspond respectively to S30 and S31 in FIG. 12 according to the above-described embodiment.
<<<circulation processing>>>

Next, the circulation process (S33 (S28 to S32)), which is one of the main differences from the above-described first embodiment, will be described. In the circulation process (S33 (S28 to S32)), interrupts are first prohibited in order to manage the gaming machine (S28). Further, in order to prepare for recursion of the interrupt processing time monitoring means, a predetermined value as the first recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). This first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H. Further, it is determined whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set (S30), and if it is set (S30: Yes), the power-off processing (S301 to S307) described below is performed.

If it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is not set (S30) (S30: No), the initial value random number update process is executed (S31) The initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. After that, after the interrupt is permitted (S32), the process returns to the interrupt prohibition (S28) again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S32) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interrupt permission (S28) is executed, the above-mentioned game progress interrupt becomes possible, and the game progress interrupt process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in S27. ..
<<Power-off processing>>

If it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is set (S30) (S30: Yes), the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursion unit, and the 22nd recursion information is set. (S301), the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the timekeeping is recurred. When the power supply is restarted by the forced setting of the second recursive information (S301), the control process is started in a state where the monitoring time has recurred. In other words, by forcing the monitoring timing to recur when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring timing recurring in the control processing immediately after the power supply is restarted. Has become.

Next, the address of the power-on information flag (power-off information flag) is set, the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is determined whether the power-on information is normally saved. (S302). Then, when the information at power-on is normally saved (S302: Yes), power-off normal data (here, 55H) is set (S304), and the checksum of the RWM at power-off is set. After being calculated (S305), checksum data is created. Then, access prohibition is set (S306), and the power-off loop processing (S307) waits until the supply voltage falls below a predetermined value and the power is shut off.

In the above-described determination of whether or not the information at power-on is normally stored (S302), if the determination result is not normally stored (S302: No), the power-off abnormality data is set. After (S303), the process proceeds to the access prohibition process (S306) described above. <<Processing to set power-off confirmation information>>

Next, a control process for setting the power-off confirmation information determined in S30 will be described. First, after the power is turned on, the control start processing (see FIG. 11 and FIG. 32) is started through a predetermined processing, and the processing for setting the timing for the game progress interrupt (FIG. 32) executed during the control start processing. The loop process (S33) is started after the steps (shown in S27). This loop processing corresponds to the circulation processing (S32) in FIG.

When the start timing of the game progress interrupt process comes after the start of the loop process, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. After that, if the power supply voltage drops during the game progress interrupt process, the control process jumps to a predetermined address (here, 0066H address) along with the non-maskable interrupt process (NMI process). Then, the power-off confirmation information indicating that the NMI processing has occurred is set, the processing of the power-off confirmation information setting for setting this power-off confirmation information is skipped to the return, and the power interruption occurs during the game progress interrupt processing. Return to processing. Then, all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interrupt process of the cycle are completed and the process returns to return, and returns to the control start process (here, the loop process (S33) in FIG. 32).

When the power supply voltage drops during the loop processing, the control processing shifts to a predetermined address (0066H) as in the case described above in association with the NMI processing. Then, the power-off confirmation information is set, the process returns to return, and returns to the control start process (here, the loop process (S33)).

Then, it is determined whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set as described above (S30 in FIG. 32). Here, if the power-off confirmation information is not set, the process shifts to the loop process start process and the circulation process (S33 in FIG. 32) is continued. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation information is set, the power-off process (corresponding to S301 to S307 described above) is executed, and the power is turned off after the power-off process is completed.

Further, in this embodiment, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the instruction being executed is completed in units of instructions. For example, if a non-maskable interrupt occurs during the execution of the control process (LD (load) instruction in this case) indicated by reference numeral 552 in FIG. 33, this control process 552 is continued during the execution of this instruction and the execution of this LD instruction is executed. After that, the above-mentioned power-off confirmation information is set. That is, the setting time of the power-off confirmation information is determined by the control process of each instruction, and the power-off confirmation information is set after completing such an instruction.

Here, the control processing including the above-mentioned commands is the control processing for each program module (in this embodiment, for example, the control start processing (see FIG. 11 and FIG. 32), the game progress interrupt processing (see FIG. 13), the initial stage). The processing is not limited to the value random number update processing (S31, S48), the input processing (S45), and other processing, and includes control processing such as setting and calculation of various data (S1 to S10, S41 to S44, etc.). It is a concept. That is, if the game progress interrupt process is taken as an example, for example, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific command that constitutes the control process of the second recursion information set (S43), execution of this specific command After that, the power off confirmation information is set. Then, the processing of the power cut confirmation information setting for setting the power cut confirmation information is skipped to the return, and returns to the processing when the power cut occurs during the game progress interrupt processing. Then, all the remaining processing to be executed in the game progress interrupt processing of the cycle is completed and exits to return, returns to control start processing (loop processing corresponding to S33 in FIG. 32), and power-off processing (previously described). (Corresponding to S301 to S307) is executed.

Further, for example, even when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific instruction in various random number update processing (S46), the power-off confirmation information is set after the execution of the specific instruction. Then, the processing for setting the power-off confirmation information is skipped to return, and the processing returns to the processing at the time of power failure during the game progress interrupt processing, and the remaining processing to be executed in the game progress interrupt processing of the cycle is completed and controlled. Returning to the start processing, the power-off processing is executed as in the case described above.

Such a control mode is the same when non-maskable interrupts are generated in various aspects during the game. For example, if a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific command from the start of the prize monitoring process (S51) described later to the end of the prize ball control process (S52), the execution of this specific command ends. After that, the power-off confirmation information is set. Then, the process returns to the prize winning monitoring process (S51) or the prize ball control process (S52), all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interrupt process of the cycle are completed and the process is returned to the control start process (FIG. 32). The process returns to the loop process corresponding to S33 in the middle) and the power-off process (corresponding to S301 to S307 described above) is executed.

Furthermore, explaining other control processing in the game progress interrupt processing, special symbol control processing (S57) which defines the control processing relating to the variation of the special symbol, special symbol variation start monitoring including the processing of jackpot lottery determination Even if a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific instruction in the control processing (S60), the abnormality detection processing (S61) that defines the error detection and error notification control processing, or the other control processing, the instruction at that time is also executed. The power-off confirmation information is set after the execution of the above, and the power-off processing is executed after all the remaining processing to be executed in the game progress interrupt processing of the cycle is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power-off required time, which is the time from when the power supply voltage drops to a predetermined value until the power is turned off, is set by the power-off required time setting means. As the power cutoff time setting means, for example, a device such as a capacitor provided on the power supply board 251 for controlling discharge can be used. As shown by a symbol M in FIG. 34, the power-off time is a value at which the power-supply voltage starts to gradually decrease from a normal value (for example, 30 V) and the power-supply board 251 outputs the power-off signal. It is the time required to reach 5V which is the supply voltage input to the CPU 501 of the main substrate 102 after reaching (for example, 18V). In the present embodiment, the power-off required time X is a time A required to complete the control start process, a time B required to complete the game progress interrupt process, a time C required to set the power-off confirmation information, and It is set so that the relationship of A+B+C+D<X is established, which is larger than the sum of the time D required to complete the power-off process.

The power-off required time is set so as to end before the timing at which the sub-board 104, which is dependent on the main board 102 and receives various control commands, starts the power-off processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned off, not only the main board 102, but also the sub-board 104 which is the sub-control means executes the power-off processing to prepare for power-off according to the content of the control processing. However, the start timing of the power-off processing executed on the sub-board 104 is after the power-off required time has elapsed on the main board 102 and the power-off processing has ended. Note that not only the sub-board 104 but also, for example, the payout control board 103, the power-off processing may be started after the required power-off time has elapsed in the main board 102. Further, the relationship between the power-off required time of the main board 102 and the start time of the power-off processing of the sub-control unit may be applied only to the payout control board 103. Further, when a sub-control unit having a control function is provided in addition to the sub-board 104 and the payout control substrate 103, the sub-control unit can be applied to the sub-control unit.
<Operation and effect of the invention according to the second embodiment of the control processing of the main board when the power is cut off>

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the above-mentioned power cut confirmation information is set and saved, and thereafter, the control processing is continued until the game progress interrupt processing of the cycle at that time is finished, and the game is played. After the progress interrupt process is completed, the power-off process (S301 to S307) is executed to turn off the power. Therefore, when the power is cut off, it is possible to turn off the power after finishing the game progress interrupt process of the cycle, and forcibly interrupting the transmission and reception of the command set during the game progress interrupt process, etc. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by aborting the game progress interrupt process.

More specifically, for example, taking the above-mentioned payout control input signal from the main board to the payout control board as an example, from the start of the prize monitoring processing (S51 in FIG. 13) to the end of the prize ball control processing (S52). Even if a voltage drop that causes a power failure occurs during the control processing for transmitting the main control MODE command, the power-off confirmation information is set after the control processing for each instruction at that time is finished. It is performed (S111), then returns to the game progress interrupt process, and the command transmission process is continued. Then, the control process for both the main control EVENT command and the main control MODE command is completed, and after all the necessary control processes in the game progress interrupt process of the period are completed, the power-off process is executed (S301 to S301). S307). Therefore, in the game progress interrupt processing unit, it is possible to easily restart the control processing when the power is restored without ending the control processing in a halfway state and turning off the power. Further, because the power supply is prevented from being cut off during the game progress interrupt process, it is not necessary to save the registers used and save the interrupt enable or disable state during the game progress interrupt process. ..

Further, for example, a special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) that defines a control process related to the variation of the special symbol, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) including a process of making a jackpot lottery determination, an error detection and Also in the abnormality detection process (S61) that defines the control process related to the error notification, or in other control processes, after the power-off confirmation information is set, the control process of command transmission and the like are completed, and the control process including these control processes is completed. The power-off process is executed after the game progress interrupt process of the cycle, which is a general control process, is completed. Therefore, in the next game progress interrupt process, it is possible to omit the control process such as re-transmitting the latter half (lower part) of the command that should have been transmitted, thereby stabilizing the information communication and reducing the load of the control process. Can be realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power supply voltage drops and reaches a predetermined value, a power cutoff time setting means for setting the time until the power is cut off thereafter is provided. The power-off required time X by the time setting means is a time A required to complete the control start process, a time B required to complete the game progress interrupt process, a time C required to set the power-off confirmation information, and It is set to be larger than the sum total of the time D required to complete the power-off process. Therefore, the control process when the power is cut off can be terminated without being interrupted midway, which also makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem at the time of power cut.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the start timing of the power-off processing of the sub-control means (sub-board 104, payout control board 103, etc.) is based on the control start processing in the main control means, the game progress interrupt processing, the power-off confirmation information. The setting and the time required for the power-off process are taken into consideration. As a result, the cooperation of the main control unit and the sub-control unit regarding the power-off process can be strengthened, and at the same time, from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. It becomes possible to complete the transmission of the control command.

Further, by devising such a control process when the power is cut off, it is possible to restrict the control state when the power is turned on again to restore the power to a certain degree.
<Third embodiment of the invention relating to control processing of main board when power is off>

Next, a third embodiment relating to the control processing of the main board when the power is cut off will be described. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the second embodiment relating to the control processing at the time of power interruption, the power interruption confirmation information is set when the supply voltage of the power source is lowered and the power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal (not shown) of the CPU 501. However, in the third embodiment, even if the power failure signal is input, the power failure confirmation information is not set unless the input mode of the power failure signal satisfies the predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, the number of times the power failure signal is input, the input period, and the like can be exemplified.

For example, the power failure signal is divided into a first power failure signal and a second power failure signal, and the first power failure signal is the same as the power failure signal of the second embodiment. Then, the first power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501. On the other hand, the second power interruption signal is output to the CPU 501 along with the output of the first power interruption signal, and when the first power interruption signal is input to the CPU 501, the second power interruption signal becomes the CPU 501. Is input to the other input terminal of. When the first power-off signal is input to the NMI terminal, the CPU 501 completes the instruction being executed at that time in the same manner as in the second embodiment, and then executes a predetermined address (here, 0066H in this case) specified on the control program. Address control) jumps to control processing. Further, the CPU 501 monitors the number of times of inputting the second power failure signal, and if the number of times of input reaches, for example, 5 times, sets the power failure confirmation information.

Even when the second power failure signal is not input five times or more, the CPU 501 shifts the control processing to the above-mentioned predetermined address (0066H) in accordance with the input of the first power failure signal to the NMI terminal. .. However, although the transfer to the predetermined address is performed, no other control process for preparing for power cutoff is performed and the power cutoff confirmation information is not set. Then, once the transfer to the above-mentioned predetermined address (0066H) is performed, the process returns to the control process before the transfer, for example, during the game progress interrupt process. In other words, even if the input mode of the second power failure signal does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the control processing temporarily shifts to the predetermined address (0066H), but without performing the control processing for setting the power cut confirmation information or the like. , And returns to the control process before the transition.

The number of times the second power failure signal is input is added every time the game progress interrupt process is repeated. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the input of the second power failure signal is repeated over the game progress interrupt process of five times.

According to the third embodiment, even if there is a signal input to the NMI terminal due to the influence of noise or the like when the power supply voltage has not dropped, the power-off confirmation information is generated only due to the signal input. It can be prevented from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the power interruption process from being erroneously executed in a situation in which the power need not be turned off and should not be turned off. Further, as in the present embodiment, after the control process is transferred to a predetermined address, the process is immediately terminated without setting the power-off confirmation information, so that the first power-off signal accompanies the input. It is possible to set more reliable power-off confirmation information while using the non-maskable interrupt function.

That is, a CPU used for various control boards of a gaming machine generally has an NMI function which is a hardware interrupt, and the CPU has an input terminal and an electronic circuit portion (logic) for the NMI function. Circuit is included). However, if it is decided to perform a control process that ignores the signal input to the NMI terminal, a design change for deleting the NMI function is necessary in terms of program and circuit design. In addition, when the NMI terminal and the electronic circuit part for the NMI are left unused and they are grounded, for example, a measure such as grounding is taken, an unused (or unused) terminal or function is used. May remain and be used for cheating. On the other hand, the configuration for the NMI function is adopted by adopting the configuration in which the control process is shifted to the predetermined address (0066H) when the first power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal as in the present embodiment. It is possible to take countermeasures against noise and the like while keeping the use of the main board 102 without deleting it while minimizing the design change of the main board 102.

In addition, in the present embodiment, five times of inputs are set as the predetermined condition that the input mode of the second power interruption signal should satisfy, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times other than five times is set. May be set. Further, the number of times is not limited to the predetermined number, and for example, the input may be performed over a predetermined period. Further, in order to generate the second power failure signal, the signal path of the first power failure signal may be branched and directly input to the CPU 501, or the branch signal of the first power failure signal may be input to the switching circuit. And so on. Further, it is desirable that the first power interruption signal and the second power interruption signal are input in synchronization with the CPU 501, but the second power interruption signal is delayed within a range in which the effects of the present embodiment can be achieved. The configuration may be adopted. Furthermore, the number of times the second power interruption signal is input is added every time the game progress interrupt process is repeated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of times during one game progress interrupt process. The number of times that satisfies the predetermined condition may be counted based on the items that can be counted.
<Application to enclosed game machines>

Further, the invention of the present application is a pachinko game machine in which a game ball as a game medium acquired by the player is paid out directly to the player so that the player can touch the prize ball as described above. The present invention is not limited to the above, and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine. Examples of the enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine are as follows. The same parts as those of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the above-described embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

In other words, the enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine has a game ball as a game medium enclosed therein, and the player operates the firing handle 20 to drive the firing motor of the launching device to move the enclosed ball to 1 It is configured so that each player can play a game by hitting the game area 52 on the front surface of the game board 50. As the configuration of the game area 52, the same configuration as that of the type of the pachinko gaming machine that delivers the game ball to the player like the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above can be adopted. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to hand over the game ball to the player, the upper ball plate 18 and the lower ball plate 19 for temporarily storing the game ball may be omitted.

The game balls that have won in the game area 52 and the game balls that have not won are guided to the ball collection trough formed on the set base 31 and are pumped by a pumping device (not shown). The lifting device incorporates a lifting screw that is rotated by a lifting motor, and a pachinko ball (game ball) is lifted by rotating the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device is provided with a polishing member that polishes the pachinko ball by contacting the pachinko ball in the process of being lifted, and the surface of the pachinko ball is polished while being lifted.

On the ball inlet side (lower side) and the ball outlet side (upper side) of the lifting device, game ball detection switches are provided, and these detection switches detect the pachinko balls to be pumped. A ball launching device is provided near the ball discharge port of the lifting device, and the game ball detected by the detection switch (on the upper side) after pumping is supplied to the ball launching device by the ball feeding device. .. The ball feeding device has a function of sending one next game ball to the hitting ball launch position each time the player operates the firing handle 20 and hits one game ball. Further, a game ball excess/deficiency detection switch is provided in the middle of the circulation path of the game balls, and it is detected whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50).

A card unit (CU), which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko gaming machine at a predetermined lateral position of the pachinko gaming machine. This point is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above. The card unit is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a recording medium for games issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member at the game hall. Pachinko machine that accepts membership cards, which are recording media for games, and uses the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls held, or number of stored balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of those cards It has a function to allow the game to be performed by elastically firing the enclosed ball in. The visitor card and membership card are IC cards.

In this pachinko gaming machine, the current number of balls held is managed by calculating the variation of the number of gaming balls on the side of the pachinko gaming machine on the card unit side. The current number of game balls is calculated and stored on the pachinko game machine side, but when the number of game balls is 0 on the pachinko game machine side, the pachinko game machine promptly launches a ball. It is a subsidiary used only for performing control to stop. By doing this, the main management function for the number of gaming balls on the pachinko gaming machine side is provided on the card unit side, and the cost on the pachinko gaming machine side is suppressed, so that the running cost of the amusement park where an enclosed gaming machine is introduced. Can be reduced.

When the power is turned on with the Pachinko gaming machine and the CU installed in the game hall and electrically connected for the first time, the payout control board on the Pachinko gaming machine side has the main chip ID transmitted from the main board. The main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control board itself is transmitted to the card unit side. On the card unit side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the data of the connection time, that is, the time when the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side are connected and the communication is started, is transmitted from the card unit side to the pachinko gaming machine side, and is transmitted on the pachinko gaming machine side. Memorize the connection time.

When the power is turned on thereafter, these three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine side to the card unit side.

On the card unit side, the transmitted data is compared with the already stored data to determine whether or not the same pachinko gaming machine as the previous one is connected. As for the connection time data, the new connection time data that the communication between the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side is started each time the power is turned on is transmitted from the card unit side to the pachinko gaming machine side. The connection time data will be stored on the pachinko machine side.

The card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to transmit the main chip ID and the like to the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine transmits the main chip ID and the like to the card unit. Further, the card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to perform authentication, and the pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit of acceptance of the authentication request from the card unit. In addition, the card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to transmit recovery information, and the pachinko gaming machine transmits the recovery information held by the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit. Subsequently, the card unit notifies the pachinko gaming machine that the pachinko gaming machine is in the connected state, and the pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit that the card is in the connected state. Also, the card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time), and the pachinko gaming machine requests the card unit to clear the recovery information and the connection ID (communication ID). The end of the backup at the start time will be notified.

Further, the card unit instructs the pachinko gaming machine to perform various operations (gaming operation), and requests transmission of gaming table information (addition/subtraction data, etc.). The card unit uses this command to periodically check the status of the gaming table. The pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit of the execution result of the game operation instruction and the gaming table information (addition/subtraction data, etc.). A command requesting the connection of the communication connection is transmitted from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when it is detected that the game ball has run out while playing on a pachinko game machine, the payout control board automatically stops the driving of the ball-launching motor and hits the ball into the game area. The game is controlled so that it cannot be played. It should be noted that only the firing of the hit ball is stopped, and if the variable display device is already performing variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first start winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 is stored at the stage when the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued. ..

The main management of the number of game balls is performed by the card unit, but only on the pachinko game machine side when performing the game prohibition control (shooting stop control) accompanying the number of game balls becoming 0 in the pachinko game machine. It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (shooting stop control) is performed. After that, as an operation response, the final ball-related information is transmitted to the card unit, and the final number of game balls “0” is determined on the card unit side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform hitting ball firing stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes 0 on the pachinko machine side.

For example, on the card unit side that mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the Pachinko game machine side becomes 0 Waiting for reception, the final game ball number is calculated on the card unit side and it becomes 0, so an operation instruction command with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the pachinko game machine side, In response to this, if pachinko game machine side controls hitting ball firing stop, pachinko balls may be fired during response and command transmission, and new subtraction ball count may occur during that time. However, on the pachinko game machine side, a new subtraction ball number is generated and the game ball number becomes negative in the end although the number of game balls is already "0". In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the hitting ball firing stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the pachinko machine side.

In this way, game control such as hit ball firing stop control is based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the card unit in order to perform the game control based on the number of game balls stored by the pachinko machine itself. As compared with the case of performing such a game control, the game control can be performed in real time according to the variation of the number of game balls.

Here, an example is shown in which the payout control board performs the hitting ball firing stop control, but the main board may perform the hitting ball firing stop control. In this case, for example, the payout control board transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main board when the number of game balls is 0. Upon receiving this signal, the main board prohibits the drive of the firing motor.

The processing of prohibiting the game by the card unit is executed also when the front frame 13 or the glass door 15 is opened or when the player returns the various cards. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine is capable of responding to the denial of prohibition, and cannot respond to the instruction of the card unit due to some reason such as an abnormality, and in the case where the front frame 13 or the glass door 15 cannot be opened, for example. , Sends a response to this prohibition refusal to the card unit. Note that the game prohibition includes not only the prohibition of driving the firing motor but also other game items such as ball lending.

Further, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine, the ball lending is not performed every predetermined amount (for example, 500 yen or 1000 yen), but the ball lending for the input amount (for example, 10,000 yen) is collectively performed. It is also possible. Since it is not necessary to hand over the game balls to the player, it is possible to easily adapt to such a ball lending mode.

In the invention of the present application, it is possible to comprehensively understand as a pachinko game machine including a card unit attached.

10 Pachinko gaming machine, 50 gaming board, 52 gaming area, 53 main control display device,
62 1st starting prize hole, 63 2nd starting prize hole, 70 1st special symbol display section,
71 second special symbol display portion, 91 first big winning opening, 92 second big winning opening,
102 main board, 104 sub-board, 113 first hit/miss determining means,
117 second winning/discarding determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub main board,
302 Sub-sub board, 501 CPU on the main board.

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit that is communicatively connected to the main control unit and performs control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
A main control display means controlled by the main control means,
The main control means,
Control start processing for executing control start processing when power is turned on,
It is possible to execute a game progress interrupt process for executing a game progress interrupt process for progressing a game at a predetermined cycle,
A predetermined random number is obtained based on that the game medium shot in the game area has flowed through the game area and passed a predetermined start area,
The random number includes at least a jackpot random number for jackpot lottery determination, and a special symbol random number for determination of a special symbol showing the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
Based on the jackpot random number, perform a jackpot lottery determination to determine whether it is a jackpot,
Based on the special symbol random number, special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol,
Based on the results of the jackpot lottery determination and the special symbol lottery determination, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display on the main control display means, and if the result of the jackpot lottery determination is a jackpot, the special symbol After the stop display of the symbol, execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than usual,
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area, if the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol is not satisfied, the special symbol holding storage information including at least the big hit random number and the special symbol random number is within a predetermined number. It is possible to remember,
At least the game progress interrupt processing,
When the special symbol reservation storage information occurs when the game medium passes through the starting area, at least the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information are transmitted as the predetermined notice information regarding the generated special symbol hold storage information. Executes a process of transmitting to the sub control means as information,
The sub-control means,
Using the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information, under the condition that the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol relating to the special symbol random number stored as the special symbol holding storage information is not satisfied, It is possible to decide whether to execute multiple types of look-ahead production,
It is decided to execute one type of look-ahead effect depending on whether the hit announcement information and the hit symbol announcement information are information indicating the execution of the first big hit or the execution of the second big hit. In this case, the number of pre-reading effect patterns that can be determined as the pre-reading effect pattern to be executed is different,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that when the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information are information indicating execution of a small hit, the prefetch effect is not executed.

Images